JP2019188040A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which ingenuity is exercised in a mode of hold display.SOLUTION: A game machine acquires lottery information on the basis of satisfaction of a start condition, executes a lottery on the basis of the lottery information, executes a variation in a decorative pattern on the basis of satisfaction of an opening condition, shows a lottery result in completion of a variation in a decorative pattern, stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit when the start condition is satisfied but the opening condition is not satisfied, displays hold display corresponding to the held lottery information on a display device, can execute a first periodical display performance with first predetermined time as one cycle for a decorative pattern during a specific period during a variation in the decorative pattern, and can execute a second periodical display performance with second predetermined time as one cycle for hold display during execution of the first display performance in the specific period. The first predetermined time is longer than the second predetermined time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 266

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win a game based on the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and the symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner so that the symbols are stopped and displayed according to the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine that generates a big hit gaming state by stopping and displaying a big hit symbol on a display device when the result is a big hit.

  Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that stores lottery information and holds it when a game ball is won at a starting port during a change in symbol, and displays a hold display corresponding to the hold on a display device. In such a gaming machine, there is an effect of changing the hold display (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-13533 A

  However, there is room for further improvement in the production.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has been devised with respect to a production aspect.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following configuration. The gaming machine acquires lottery information related to the winning based on the establishment of the start condition, executes a lottery based on the lottery information, a display device on which the effect is displayed, and a decorative symbol on the display device. Display, execute a variation of the decorative symbol based on the establishment of the start condition, and a decorative symbol variation means for indicating the result of the lottery at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, the satisfaction of the start condition is satisfied When the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding unit that stores and holds the lottery information with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and a holding display corresponding to the lottery information held by the holding unit are displayed on the display device. The decorative design changing means is a periodic first having a first predetermined time as one cycle for the decorative design in a specific period during the change of the decorative design. The hold display means can perform a periodic second display effect with a second predetermined time as one cycle for the hold display during execution of the first display effect in the specific period. The first predetermined time is longer than the second predetermined time (see, for example, paragraphs [1905] to [2121], FIGS. 266 to 282, etc.).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is devised for production.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of an outer frame, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit, etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which a game ball circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit and side unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit and side unit in a front unit from the back, (c) is It is a left view of a starting port unit, (d) is a left view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start port unit and side unit in a game board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in a front unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the 1st big winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the channel | path of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the back. It is a front view of a center character. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in a front unit from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in a front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the channel | path of the game ball in a 2nd attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram in which a right portion in the game area is enlarged in FIG. 115. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of a game board in the state where the door frame was made transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back production unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back back effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back back effect unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration body with a back back decoration board | substrate. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 142, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable decoration body from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable decoration body from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows a light guide radiation plate and a back back decoration board with a broken line in the front view of FIG. (A) is a front view which shows a part of decorative body in a back movable movable decorative body, (b) is a front view which shows a part of decorative sheet in the same site | part as the decorative body of (a), (c ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative substrate at the same site as the decorative body of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of Fig.143 (a). It is an exploded view which decomposes | disassembles and shows sectional drawing of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front of a back movable movable body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decoration body and a decoration sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and back back decoration board in the site | part of 1st LED in a cross section, (b) has 2nd LED located on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the site | part which is located from the front, (c) is LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and 1st LED of a back back decoration board | substrate It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back decoration board | substrate with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back back decoration board | substrate, (b) is a rear view of a back back decoration board | substrate. (A) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of decorative body in a back back movable decorative body, (b) is an expanded cross section which shows a part of decorative body with the metal decoration part of a form different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of decoration body which has the metal decoration part of a form further different from (a) and (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decorative body of 2nd embodiment different from the back back movable decorative body of FIG. 142, (b) is a back back movable decorative body of 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows this structure in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) looked at the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in a back unit from back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower left production | presentation unit and the back lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back lower left production | presentation unit and a back lower right production | presentation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production unit under back in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production unit under back in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back under middle raising / lowering mechanism of the back under middle production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back under middle raising / lowering mechanism of the back under middle production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower middle decorative body unit of the back lower middle production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows raising / lowering of the back lower middle decoration body unit by the back lower middle raising / lowering mechanism in a back lower middle production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the structure concerning rotation of a back lower middle rotation decoration body of a back lower middle decoration body unit in a back lower middle effect production unit, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each detection sensor with a table | surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of LED of the back lower inside decoration body unit in a back lower inside production | presentation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back production | presentation unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper production unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back top effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back upper rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the back raising / lowering decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decoration board | substrate from the front in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position in a back upper effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back left production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back left production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back left production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back left decoration body unit in a back back left production | presentation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back right performance unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back right performance unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right performance unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right performance unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back right effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back right decoration body unit in a back back right effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a closed state in a back front left production unit, (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in an open state in a back front left production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a closed state in a back front right production unit, (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in an open state in a back front right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back and rear rotating decorative body of the back rear direction rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a back right rotation decoration object in the state where it moved from the retreat position to the 1st appearance position, respectively. The back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back and rear movable decorative body of the back rear stage production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear rear rotation decoration body of the back rear stage production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back rear left rotation decoration body of the back rear left production unit. From the retraction position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotation decoration body of the back rear right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the lower back middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle production unit from the lowering position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of the pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by main control MPU, (b) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the interruption process regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a winning determination table used for lottery processing for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big winning types, and (C) is a small winning type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process about. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure determination table used for the lottery process for the normal map, and (B) is an open pattern table for the normal map used for the determination process for the open pattern for the normal map. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory release process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control process performed by the periphery control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. It is a transition diagram which shows an example of the game state transition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush rush opportunity production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush rush opportunity production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rush rush opportunity production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in the small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in the small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in the high accuracy time short and big hit. It is an example of the time table of a demo screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of volume control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rise effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a rise effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing at which the promotion effect in a rising effect is performed. (A) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening without a reservation and a change non-execution. (B) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening without hold and during execution of variation. (C) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening in a state where there is one hold. (D) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball wins a starting opening in a state where there are two reservations. (E) is a reservation color determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening in a state where there are three reservations. It is an example of a change pending color determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reservation notice effect by a reservation color change. (A) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when a game ball wins a start opening while no hold is made and no change is executed. (B) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when a game ball wins a start opening while there is no hold and fluctuating execution. (C) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening in a state where there is one hold. (D) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening in a state where there are two holds. (E) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a start opening in a state where there are 3 holds. It is an example of a gacha coin reserved color correspondence table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a gacha coin reservation notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach collapse pseudo-continuous production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of reach design promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in the sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in the sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a hold peep production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a decoration design cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a state display cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a state display cycle production are performed simultaneously. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using multiple types of effect symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using multiple types of effect symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect using multiple types of effect symbols. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a replay effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a replay effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a replay effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in which a reservation cycle production and a movable body production are performed simultaneously.

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“Transparent, flat decorative members with decorations,
A transparent, flat plate-like radiation plate that is provided behind the decorative member and can radiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness;
A production member comprising a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, and a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate It is characterized by comprising.

  Here, the “decorative member” may be composed of one member, or composed of a plurality of members (for example, a relief part formed by three-dimensional relief) And a decorative sheet having a pattern).

  Examples of the “decoration” of the decorative member include “three-dimensional relief”, “two-dimensional pattern”, “three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern”, and the like. . In addition, as "decoration", "decoration with logos and characters according to the gaming machine concept", "decoration with characters according to the gaming machine concept", "items according to the gaming machine concept" "Decoration with", "decoration with a scene in line with the concept of the gaming machine", and the like.

  Further, as the “radiating plate”, “a plate that is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions for accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear”, “a plate within the plate thickness” Having a plurality of reflecting portions reflecting light in the direction along the surface forward, ”“ a plurality of reflecting portions reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface in the plate thickness forward ” Some have ", etc.

  Examples of the “LED” mounted on the decorative substrate include “side-view type LED”, “top-view type LED mounted sideways”, and the like. Examples of “LED” include “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “two color LED”, and the like.

  In addition, as the configuration for irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, “configuration for irradiating light from the inner surface of the hole penetrating the radiation plate into the thickness”, “radiation plate `` A structure that irradiates light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the slit that is open to the side surface side of the radiation plate '', `` From the inner surface of the concave part that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate '' Examples include a configuration in which light is irradiated into the plate thickness and a configuration in which light is irradiated into the plate thickness from the side surface of the radiation plate.

  Furthermore, the “production member” may be movable or may be fixed without being movable.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided with a decorative flat plate-shaped decorative member having a translucency, and is provided behind the decorative member, and the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness A transparent, flat plate-like radiation plate that can radiate forward light and a plurality of LEDs that can emit light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface. The effect member provided with the decoration board | substrate provided in back is provided.

  As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative member and the decorative board behind the radiation plate are caused to emit light, the light from the LEDs is irradiated in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. By the light emitted forward by the radiation plate and emitted forward from the radiation plate, the translucent decorative member provided with the decoration is illuminated and decorated. At this time, since the light irradiated from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward within the thickness of the radiation plate to make the decorative member emit light, the LED is moved forward. Compared to the conventional case of irradiating light toward the front, the distance until the LED light is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED is diffused widely and the radiation plate Can be emitted forward. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be diffused widely, and it can be suppressed that the LED appears to emit light in a dotted manner. It can be shown beautifully, and it can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. Further, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the effect member can be easily secured. In addition, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a player more entertaining by providing various effect members.

  In addition, the decorative member is provided at the rear of the transparent and flat decorative body having a relief part that is formed by three-dimensional relief forming at least a part of the decoration, It is desirable to comprise with the sheet-like decoration sheet which has the pattern which comprises the remainder of decoration. Thereby, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the relief part and the decoration sheet having the pattern, the relief part can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. A feeling of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided on the back by the lens effect by the relief of the relief part. Therefore, since the player can show a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth by the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration is made even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted or entertained, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. it can.

  In addition, as described above, when the decorative member is configured by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, so that the transparent decorative body is provided. Even if it is not colored, it can appear that the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet, and the cost of the decorative body can be reduced. In this case, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, so that the gaming machine can easily cope with a model change or a design change. Can do.

  Moreover, you may make it have a hologram part in which a decoration is comprised in a decoration member and a picture is displayed by the interference fringe of light. As a result, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, light in the game hall in which the game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram part, Because the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, the player's attention can be attracted strongly, and the hologram can be part of the decoration of the decoration member. A stereoscopic effect can be imparted, and even if the effect member is thinned, the player can be prevented from feeling thin.

  Furthermore, when the decorative member is configured to have a hologram portion and the decorative member is configured by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, the hologram portion is configured to configure at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet. Also good. Thereby, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part. A feeling of depth can be given to the design, and a decoration that can attract the player's interest can be shown to the player. In this case, since the hologram sheet is provided on the decorative sheet, a printing technique can be used for forming the hologram part, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the decorative member is composed of a decorative body and a decorative sheet, the decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the external shape of the decorative body after the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat. Is desirable. Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame like the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration appear large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be fully exerted, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the effect member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a player.

  In addition, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is irregularly reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. The pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In addition, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, the size in the front-rear direction of the decorative member made up of the decorative body and the decorative sheet can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the thickness of the member and realizing the above-described operational effects.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. By making the decoration aspect of the member adjacent to the production member a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the production member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, and the visual impact to the player It is possible to attract attention and entertain large decorations, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED housing portions that are formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are housed from behind. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the rear surface of the radiation plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate as close as possible by accommodating the LED from behind in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate, and the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction. The gaming machine that can be thinned and has the above-described effects can be realized with certainty.

  Moreover, when it has made it have the LED accommodating part which becomes depressed toward the front which can accommodate LED in a radiation plate, since it becomes possible to irradiate the light from LED from the inner surface of an LED accommodating part to board thickness. Compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a portion of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the central portion), an LED housing portion is provided in the portion. By irradiating light from the inner surface, the part can be illuminated brightly, and the decorative member can be illuminated and decorated without unevenness.

  Moreover, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative substrate be of a side view type that can irradiate light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in a direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate). Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  Furthermore, it is desirable to have a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate. Thereby, from the LED of the decorative substrate, when light is irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light emission, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In addition, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, so that reflection is possible even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. There is no need to change the portion, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

  Furthermore, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative substrate on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. Thus, compared to the case where electronic components such as ICs and resistors other than LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate, the radiation plate is increased by the height of the electronic component from the substrate surface of the decorative substrate. The rear surface can be brought close to the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be further reduced.

  In addition, as described above, when electronic parts such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, when a side view type LED is used, irradiation is performed in a direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to prevent the light from the LED to be blocked by the electronic component, and to sufficiently reach the light from the LED. Therefore, since the shadow by the electronic component is not possible, the entire decoration member can be uniformly decorated with light emission, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light emission effect, and the entire decoration member can be formed even with a small number of LEDs. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
"The decorative member is
A transparent and flat decorative body having a relief part which is formed by three-dimensional relief forming at least part of the decoration;
It is provided with a sheet-like decorative sheet provided behind the decorative body and having a picture constituting the rest of the decoration.

  Here, as the “decorative body”, the relief part may be provided on both the front surface and the rear surface, or the relief part may be provided only on the front surface. The part may be provided only on the rear surface.

  In addition, “decorative sheets” include “having a hologram portion on which a pattern is displayed by light interference fringes” and “having a prism portion on which innumerable minute prisms are formed”. , “Having a lens portion on which innumerable minute lenses are formed”, “having an opaque portion that makes the rear view invisible”, and the like.

  Moreover, as a relationship between the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the embossed part and the pattern may be related to each other, or the embossed part and the pattern may be completely unrelated.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative member has a transparent and flat decorative body having a relief part which is formed by three-dimensional relief and forms at least a part of the decoration, and behind the decorative body. And a sheet-like decorative sheet having a pattern that constitutes the rest of the decoration.

  Thereby, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of the decorative body having the relief part and the decoration sheet having the pattern, the relief part can give the decoration a three-dimensional effect. A feeling of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided on the back by the lens effect by the relief of the relief part. Therefore, since the player can show a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth by the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration is made even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted or entertained, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. it can.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body seems to be colored by the color of the decorative sheet pattern without coloring the transparent decorative body. The cost for the decorative body can be reduced. In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The decorative member is
It has a hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light ”.

  Here, examples of the “hologram portion” include “transmission hologram”, “rainbow hologram”, “Lippmann hologram”, and the like. In addition, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member, or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative member has a hologram portion that constitutes a part of the decoration and displays a pattern with light interference fringes.

  As a result, light from the LED on the decorative board, light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, light in the game hall in which the game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram part, Because the predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, the player's attention can be attracted strongly, and the hologram can be part of the decoration of the decoration member. A stereoscopic effect can be imparted, and even if the effect member is thinned, the player can be prevented from feeling thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The hologram part is
It constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is configured by the hologram portion.

  Thereby, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part. A feeling of depth can be given to the design, and a decoration that can attract the player's interest can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 2 to means 4,
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface, and
The decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

  By the way, in the prior art like patent document 1, the decoration body provided in the foremost side in the production member has a flange-like portion protruding rearward over substantially the entire outer periphery. Therefore, when a sheet-like decorative sheet is provided behind the decorative body, it is necessary to make the outer periphery size of the decorative sheet smaller than the inner peripheral size of the flange-shaped part of the decorative body. The presence of the flange part on the outer periphery of the decorative sheet image that can be seen through makes it appear that it is small and fits in the frame, and the decoration of the production member looks small and can fully exhibit the decoration effect There is a risk of disappearing.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

  Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet, Since there is no frame like the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration appear large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be fully exerted, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the effect member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a player.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet comes into contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is irregularly reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is made flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member made up of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be thinned and can realize the above-described effects.

  Furthermore, since it can decorate to the outer periphery of a production | presentation member (decoration body) with the pattern of a decoration sheet, the decoration aspect of the member adjacent to the said production | generation member is the decoration which continues with the decoration of the said production | presentation member, By doing this, you can show the player a large, united decoration, give the player a visual impact, and be able to entertain the large decoration, reducing the player's interest Can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“The radiation plate
It is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear side ”.

  Here, as the “LED housing portion”, “a hole-like one penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction”, “a bottomed concave shape recessed forward from the rear surface of the radiation plate”, “radiation” The slit-shaped thing which has penetrated the board to the front-back direction, and was open | released to the side surface "etc. are mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the radiation plate is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface toward the front, and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear.

  Thereby, since it has made it have the LED accommodating part which can accommodate LED mounted in the front surface of a decoration board in a radiation board, let the LED accommodating part accommodate LED from the back, and the rear surface of a radiation plate The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member can be reduced in the front-rear direction, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Moreover, since it has made it have the LED accommodating part which becomes depressed toward the front which can accommodate LED in a radiation board, it becomes possible to irradiate the light from LED from the inner surface of an LED accommodating part to board thickness. . As a result, compared with the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in a portion of the radiation plate where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach (for example, the central portion), an LED housing portion is provided in the portion. By irradiating light from the inner surface of the lever, the part can be illuminated brightly, and the decorative member can be illuminated and decorated without unevenness.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 6,
“The LED
It is a side view type that can irradiate light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the LED on the decorative board is of a side view type that can irradiate light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

  As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, light can be emitted from the LED in a direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiating plate). Irradiation into the plate thickness of the plate can be facilitated, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

  In the decorative substrate, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the side view type LED that irradiates light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate from being blocked by the electronic components, and the light from the LED is sufficiently transmitted. You can make it. Therefore, since the shadow by the electronic component is not possible, the entire decoration member can be uniformly decorated with light emission, and the player can be entertained with a good-looking light emission effect, and the entire decoration member can be formed even with a small number of LEDs. Can be decorated with light emission, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
“The radiation plate
It has a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward on substantially the entire rear surface.

  Here, as the “reflecting portion”, “quadrangular pyramid”, “triangular pyramid”, “conical”, “pent roof (gable)”, “hemispheric”, Etc. In addition, the “reflecting part” may be provided in a fixed pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decorative substrate, or may be provided on a concentric arc centered on the corresponding LED.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate.

  Thereby, from the LED of the decorative substrate, when light is irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire rear surface, Since light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be decorated with light emission, and the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In addition, since a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member, the decoration provided on the decorative member can be changed. There is no need to change the reflecting portion, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

Mean 9: In the gaming machine,
“A transparent flat-shaped decorative body having a relief portion that is part of the decoration and formed by three-dimensional relief, and the rear surface is formed flat, and provided behind the decorative body. A decorative sheet in the form of a sheet having a hologram part on which a part of the pattern is displayed by a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration and light interference fringes, and having the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, A plate-shaped decorative member having translucency composed of;
A plurality of LED housing portions provided behind the decorative member and formed so as to be recessed forward from the rear surface, and light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness are reflected forward on substantially the entire rear surface. A transparent, flat plate-like radiation plate capable of radiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflection portions;
A plurality of side view type LEDs that are housed from behind in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate and can irradiate light in a direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface, It is characterized by having a production member provided with a decorative substrate provided behind the board.

  According to the structure of the means 9, the gaming machine has a transparent flat decorative body which has a relief part which is a part of the decoration and is formed by three-dimensional relief, and whose rear surface is flat. And a picture portion provided behind the decoration body and constituting the rest of the decoration, and a hologram portion on which a part of the picture is displayed by light interference fringes, and is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decoration body A plate-shaped decorative member having translucency composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet, and a plurality of LED housing portions provided on the rear side of the decorative member and formed to be recessed forward from the rear surface; And a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward on substantially the entire rear surface, and the plurality of reflecting portions in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. A transparent, flat plate-like radiation plate that can emit light forward, A plurality of side view type LEDs that are housed in the LED housing part of the board from behind and can irradiate light in the direction along the board surface within the thickness of the radiation board are mounted on the front surface, and are provided behind the radiation board. The effect member provided with the decorative board | substrate currently provided is comprised.

  Thereby, in the production member, a transparent radiating plate and a decorative substrate are provided behind the decorative member made up of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and a plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiating plate A side view type LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate is inserted into each of the accommodating portions. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are caused to emit light, light from the LEDs is irradiated from the inner surface of the LED housing portion in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, The light is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light radiated forward from the radiation plate is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body constituting the decorative member, so that the decorative member having translucency provided with the decoration is provided. It will be decorated with light emission. At this time, because the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate from the LED is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions within the thickness of the radiation plate, the decoration member is decorated with light emission. Compared with the case where the LED is directed forward, the distance until the LED light is emitted forward from the front surface of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED can be broadened. It can be diffused and radiated forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be diffused widely, and it can be suppressed that the LED appears to emit light in a dotted manner. It can be shown beautifully, and it can entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the effect member, since the decorative substrate is provided behind the flat decorative member and the radiation plate, the dimension in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the effect member can be easily secured. In addition, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make a player more entertaining by providing various effect members.

  Furthermore, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief part and a decoration sheet having a pattern, the relief part can give a stereoscopic effect to the decoration, A feeling of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet provided behind the lens effect by the relief of the relief. Therefore, since the player can show a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth by the embossed part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration is made even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted or entertained, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. it can.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet having the pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the embossed portion, the decorative body seems to be colored by the color of the decorative sheet pattern without coloring the transparent decorative body. The cost for the decorative body can be reduced. In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

  In addition, the decorative sheet of the decorative member has a hologram portion on which a part of a pattern as a decoration is displayed by light interference fringes. The light from the LED of the decorative substrate is provided in the game machine. Because the light from other light emitting means, the light in the game hall where this game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram part, a predetermined hologram can be shown by the light interference fringe, so the appearance of the decoration by the hologram And can attract the player's interest strongly, and the hologram can give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decoration of the decoration member. It can be made not to feel thinness.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern of the decorative sheet is constituted by the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through a transparent decorative body having a relief part. It is possible to give a feeling of depth to the player and to show the player a decoration that can attract the player's interest. In addition, since the decorative sheet has the hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the decorative member, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body is decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame like the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration appear large. Therefore, the decoration of the effect member (the design of the decoration sheet, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the effect of the effect of the effect member can be fully exerted, and the player's interest is strongly attracted by the decoration of the effect member. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a player.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet comes into contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is irregularly reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. In addition, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is made flat, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member made up of the decorative body and the decorative sheet as much as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be thinned and can realize the above-described effects.

  Further, the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and can be decorated up to the outer periphery of the effect member (decorative body) with the pattern of the decoration sheet. By making the decoration mode of the member that is present to be a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the production member, it is possible to show the player a large, united decoration, and give the player a visual impact and attract attention. In addition, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from behind, the rear surface of the radiation plate can be accommodated by allowing the LED accommodating portions of the radiation plate to accommodate the LEDs from behind. The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member can be reduced in the front-rear direction, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Moreover, since the LED of the decorative substrate is accommodated in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate and the light from the LED is irradiated from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion into the plate thickness, the light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. Compared with the case where it does so, also in the part (for example, center part) of the radiation plate which the light from an outer peripheral surface does not reach easily, an LED accommodating part is provided in the said part, and it is made to irradiate light from the inner surface. Thus, the part can be illuminated brightly, and the decorative member can be illuminated and decorated without unevenness.

  Furthermore, since the LED on the decorative substrate is of a side view type, the LED is accommodated in the LED housing portion of the radiating plate so as to emit light. It is possible to irradiate light in a different direction, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that exhibits the above-described effects.

  In addition, a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, and light can be emitted to almost the entire decorative member. Therefore, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the reflective member can be reflected. There is no need to change the portion, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A game area into which a game medium is to be driven by a player's operation;
A plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which gaming media are driven by the player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media, and games to the receiving game This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  Note that it is desirable that the effect (light emission effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative board is executed by receiving the game medium that has been driven into the game area at the reception port. As a result, when a game medium is received at the reception port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and an effect in which the decorative member of the effect member is lit and decorated is executed. It is possible to make it easier to continue the game medium that is aimed at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one effect, the decorative member of the effect member may be decorated with light emission. As a result, the decorative member is illuminated and decorated, so that it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact by the above-described effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player is It can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous is generated (for example, “big hit”), and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the player can be shown a light-emitting effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative member with light-emitting decoration, an effect for suggesting the player the result of the lottery special lottery (for example, It can be used suitably for reach production), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 11: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of swirl bodies each having a plurality of designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine is operated by a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by the player operating after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotating bodies stopped by the player operating each of the plurality of stop operating parts. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  In addition, for the effect (light emission effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate, the combination of the symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line is the combination of the winning combination symbols When satisfying (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be illuminated and decorated. Thereby, the decoration member is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative member may be light-decorated, so that the decorative member is light-decorated to give a strong impact to the player. , It can be considered that the advantageous gaming state (for example, “BB”) that the player is advantageous when stopped by a combination of specific symbols, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the player can be shown a light-emitting effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative member with light-emitting decoration, it is suitable for an effect for instructing the player of the lottery internal lottery. It can be used, and a player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 12: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  In addition, for the effect (light emission effect) in which the decorative member is illuminated by the light emission of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate, the combination of the symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line is the combination of the winning combination symbols When satisfying (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be illuminated and the lottery result of the internal lottery At this time, the decorative member may be decorated with light emission, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B (For example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) for giving a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006 And. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, the second major winning port 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player to drive the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, Left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a square frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. Thus, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like upright portion 60b rising upward from a rear side portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a from the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower dish facing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to the front. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end position from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 222 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b, and the operation transmission unit 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud preventing member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and has an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the laced string to cause an illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 A string attached to the illegal game ball B by momentum is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiver that opens to the rear on the lower right side of the front passage of the through ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a and that can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4. A game ball B that receives the game ball B (foul ball) and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full ball reception port 150b and the foul ball reception port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear side and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and a left-right separated space. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the present embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is bulged forward and opened upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged part to the right in front view, the front end is retracted rearward, and the guide passage portion 201a whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lowered on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow with the rear open). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left at the lower right corner in front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a through port 213b penetrating vertically in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or ball lending machines (for example, CR units) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) After inserting cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. Or deducting and returning the game balls B that have been rented out the cash and prepaid cards that have been thrown into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the bowl and unit after removing the bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game ball B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends to the left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a is supplied to the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are partly projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In addition, a step with the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 being higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. Accordingly, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Can be used as a finger hook when operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Moreover, the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward due to the steps between the upper left bulging portion 252a and the upper right flaring portion 252a.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. Is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are opened.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with the top opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210 And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the production operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface part 336a in which a circular arc constituting the outer part and the lower part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of protrusions projecting from the inner side of the outer lower surface part 336a upward and to the center side And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344, and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotational drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f that is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. A side panel 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is wavy so that it moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b, and the rotation operation section 302, outer periphery Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a at the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is meandered in a plan view, and an illegal tool is seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side to the right side from the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B circulating in two upper and lower stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is lifted to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear portion of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. From any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 is formed with a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main body frame base 501 with the right side extending in the vertical direction of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame cage 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. The main guiding portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature that is curved on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical bite can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side becomes the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side becomes higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a flat plate shape from the position lower than the distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step 501n and the right step 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step 501n and the right step 501o, and extend in the form of a strip in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lowered. And a weir portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d on the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end being slanted so that the distribution direction thereof is perpendicular to the slant rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends obliquely (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 on the downstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left and right direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (the right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction in a plan view and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )is doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by operating a lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lowered as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging due to the engagement of the game balls B (so-called ball balls).

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from pressing strongly in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed and bitten by the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the game balls B can be prevented from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Accordingly, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be moved away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 from the overflow surface portion 501m is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the gaming board as viewed from the rear. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a game area in which game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and the obstacle nail.

  In the following description, when the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). Detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening 2006 are provided. In this gaming board 5, the game ball B has a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first grand winning port 2005, and a second large winning port in the gaming area 5a. For example, in 2006, the player can enter or pass the handle 182 and play the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component member 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor and a drive solenoid, and a drive board box 1730 for housing the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 The first grand prize opening 2005 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port that allow the game ball B to be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and is provided in the up-and-down direction in the game area 5a and the out-port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a. Are provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game area 5a from the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, provided in the front right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the front side in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided slightly above the center and a right side of the center accessory 2500 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 and has a second grand prize opening 2006. The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning port 2001 and the second sub-out port 2012, and above the side right middle unit 2700 And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 having a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall and a box shape with the front open. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is provided at the front left end decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The rear guidance unit 3050 is provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The rear back left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. The front right effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and the front right effect unit 3700 provided between the front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the central lower part in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left part when viewed from the front, And an out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side thereof is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out-port 2010 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with two game balls B having a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparently, so that the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front. Since the front component member 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the fact that the boundary of the game area 5a can be clearly seen when assembled to the game board 5. In addition to giving the player a sense of openness, the game area 5a can be shown larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 is made transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the production display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (player side). It is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decoration of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating front and rear and a short long hole, and at an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width where the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step is about the same size as the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball. Front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A cylindrical portion 3081 of the out ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out concave portion 1123.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion and is disposed outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. A pair of engagement pieces that respectively engage with the two engagement step portions on the lower side of the. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left side by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally upper front. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state in which the panel plate 1110 is accommodated in the holding step portion by elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion that is in place with the engaging claw. At this time, the projecting pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it can be reduced that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled to the game board 5, While it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the player, the game area 5a can be shown large (wide) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front component member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (player side). It is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decoration of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state where the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out of the back unit 3000. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all of the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can do.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second start port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3051, a first big winning port sensor 2402, and a second large winning port. A sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 displays a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B in the gate unit 2003 and a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status. A normal symbol display composed of two LEDs, and a normal retention indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of opening / closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “winning” or the like. A round indicator composed of five LEDs for displaying

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 110, FIG. 113, FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the presentation operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3, the presentation display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using white LEDs as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 that protrude upward from the upper end surface, and one lower fixing piece 1602 that protrudes downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. The first grand prize opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B is different from the first big prize opening 2005 position A game ball B that can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is provided and received by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. And two major prize winning openings 2006.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning port 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged directly above the right general prize opening 2001 above the second start opening 2004.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is disposed below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is disposed on the right side of the right general winning port 2001.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, provided in the front right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the front side in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second attacker unit 2600 having a second big prize opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate portion 2003 provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118A is a perspective view of the front opening unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the front opening unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. ) Is a left side view of the start port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front face of the general prize opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending in parallel with the surface of the game area 5 a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101, and the peripheral wall portion 2102. And a flat plate-like flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and the entirety is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long to the left and right and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a bowl shape having an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided rearward.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 and has a first start port 2002 that can receive the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Forming.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. Located directly under the center of Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 and guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 due to the inclination of the bowl-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is affixed to the front surface of the front wall 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first start opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player is prompted to perform the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the first start opening 2002. A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous gaming state in which a player such as a “big hit” game is advantageous is performed by allowing the first starting port 2002 to accept the game ball B is performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  In this start-up unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at an angle (closer to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B to the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B is seen for a longer time than the game ball B received at the general winning port 2001, so It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002, and to express the joy (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

  In addition, when the start opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located behind and is provided in the lower lower middle production unit 3300. The backside middle decorative body unit 3320 is illuminated and decorated with light from LEDs such as the backside middle first decorative board 3322 and the backside middle second decorative board 3329.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the start port unit 2100, a rib straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first start port 2002 may be provided. This rib is formed in a triangle (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall 2203 of the two general winning ports 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the portion inclined from the upper end. (The rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backwards is determined so that the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It can be made later than the timing at which it abuts against the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. Three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two right general winning openings 2001 are opened upward, and the left general winning opening 2001 is opened upward.

  The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends in a bowl shape from the base plate to the front and rear and is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes downward and is separated from the left and right. One guide rod, a first front wall portion closing the front end side of each of the two first guide rods, and extending from the base plate to the front and rear in a bowl shape on the left side of the two first guide rods And a second front wall portion closing the front end side of the second guide rod. The side unit 2200 is formed of a transparent member as a whole.

  The first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are U-shaped in cross section. The first guide rod 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide rod 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed leftward. The front end of the first guide rod 2202 extends from the bottom about 3/4 of the height from the bottom, and the upper side extends vertically. It extends diagonally. Accordingly, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide rod 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3/4 from below.

  The second guide rod 2204 has a vertical front end. Accordingly, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide rod 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. And the game ball B can be received by the site | part which protrudes ahead rather than the panel board 1110 in the 1st guide rod 2202 and the 2nd guide rod 2204, and the 1st front wall part 2203 and the 2nd front wall part 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, portions of the first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And it protrudes back rather than the rear surface of the panel board 1110. FIG. The first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are inclined so that the bottom faces are lowered toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  In the state in which the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any one of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general prize port sensor 3051, It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  Unlike the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 has no decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general winning port 2001, It is less conspicuous than the first start port 2002. In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, it is possible to emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the general winning ports 2001, and a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It won't look bad.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. Light emission from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be decorated, and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that respectively forms the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001, the back bottom left side of the back unit 3000 is affected by the portion. The light irradiated forward from the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the effect unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved.

  In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start port unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increased. The bottom surfaces of the first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the start port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time while allowing the player to reliably recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, the first start opening 2002, the first grand prize opening 2005, the second big prize opening 2006, etc. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In other words, the bent portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 that is bent and obliquely inclined is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start port unit 2100. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B is seen for a longer time than the game ball B received at the general winning port 2001, so It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002, and to express the joy (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the 1st front wall part 2203 which each forms the front end of the two general winning a prize port 2001 is inclined, from the side of the 1st guide rod 2202 the 1st front wall part 2203 It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part. When the game ball B passes through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, and therefore, depending on the player, the gaming ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001. If the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of this embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide rod 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B in a short time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the illusion that the game ball B that has passed through the front of the first front wall portion 2203 is received in the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, so that the game ball in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, when the majority of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, depending on the player, the gaming balls B may enter the general winning opening 2001. The illusion is as if it was received, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if a privilege (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to avoid having distrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side. It is possible to continue to entertain the game to the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The side unit 2200 has a front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning port 2001 among the three general winning ports 2001 extending in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall 2205. And has the same shape as the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 at the left end, an illusion that the player has received the game ball B at the start port can be given. And even if the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 that is illusioned to be the start opening, the special lottery result will not be drawn, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrustful There is a risk. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end (a position that cannot be received by “right-handed”) of the side unit 2200 leftward from the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since a decorative sticker indicating the start opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that it is not the start opening, and the player has an interest in the game by feeling distrust. It is possible to avoid the reduction.

  In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared to the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the decorative sticker is not affixed to the front face of the general winning opening 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The horizontal inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning opening such as the big winning opening and the bonus winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the upper side is pivoted about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable prize opening is larger than the general prize opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable prize opening are large. Wish to win. Alternatively, even in the case of a variable winning opening (large winning opening) for which the prescribed number of winnings is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number. Therefore, since the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is made slower than the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Thus, as described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening and to the general winning opening 2001 for the pleasure (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door is loose in the open state, it takes a long time until the opening of the winning opening door is closed, so that the game ball B wins more than the prescribed number for the player. Can make you think.

  Further, in the two general winning award ports 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion, rather than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. The distance is longer. As a result, since the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Can be made invisible from the player's view at an early stage.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 is shown in which the front face of the specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined among the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 The front face of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal game state through the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not inclined can be entered. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 without tilting the front face is in an advantageous gaming state (during “short time”, “probability change” or “hit”). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “right-handed”) may be provided at a position where it can enter or may be provided at both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general prize opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening) is opened from the closed time. Narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out when winning a big winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the player wins more than the specified number even if the predetermined winning number is a large winning opening. I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has won the grand prize opening rolls to the back side is considered to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general prize opening 2001 with the front face tilted rolls to the back side. Yes. In other words, when winning a prize to the general prize opening 2001 that is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big prize opening, it is considered to be faster than the speed at which the game ball B that won the big prize opening rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning opening with more payouts takes longer to disappear from the player's view. As a result, a winning opening with more payouts can provide a longer joyful time when winning.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The entire upper left side unit 2300 is formed to be transparent.

  In the state in which the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing the path of a game ball in the first attacker unit in cross section.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, from the front to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start port 2004, a first big prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided on the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning port 2005 is on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and is more than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big winning port 2005.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2401 and a first ball detecting the game ball B received in the first grand prize winning port 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2402, a first sub out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided. Two first prize winning opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

  The first attacker unit 2400 has a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second start port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2414 being movable to open and close the second start port 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for closing the opening, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first winning opening 2005, For moving the first prize opening door 2417 to open and close the first big prize opening 2005 Includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear face of the rear cover 2413, the first big prize opening decoration board 2420 for decorating the first big prize opening 2005 with light emission, Second start port sensor 2401, first grand prize port sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big prize port decoration board 2420 and panel relay board And a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating front and rear under the first opening 2411a, A second opening 2411c penetrating back and forth long in the left and right in the upper left part from the center, two second guide holes 2411d penetrating in the front and rear side by side in the left and right below the second opening 2411c, And a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the one guide hole 2411b.

  The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c is four to six times as long as the diameter of the game ball B and extends to the left and right, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

  Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two abutting portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 to be in contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 immediately above the first guide hole 2411b. In addition, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 is attached directly above the two second guide holes 2411d with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide. In addition, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape opened to the rear, and is formed in a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a path for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending from the vicinity of the upper right corner so as to be lowered to the left in the front view, and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left. It extends slightly shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lowered to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a and spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B, and between the first shelf 2412a And the second shelf 2412b forming the second start port 2004, and the second shelf so as to be lowered to the left from the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. A third shelf 2412c that extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and a third shelf 2412c that is spaced from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B. Lower from the lower position to the left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412a is farther leftward from the right side of the front cover 2412 slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  Also, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412, a fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. And a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered leftward. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right after extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The space between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l that connects lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From the position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining so as to be lowered to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to circulate between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, and to the middle of the left fourth standing wall portion 2412h And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second start port 2004 is the lowest.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, respectively. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n that extends and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends in a stepped manner so as to be lowered to the left along the upper side of the front cover, and an interval at which the game ball B can circulate between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with a gap. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The upper shelf 2412p has a right end located immediately above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. The upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

  Although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangularly formed in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions protruding rearward in shape. These abutting portions are arranged so that the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed. By collaborating, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second start port door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big prize port door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 holds the second start port sensor 2401, the first big prize port sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the front cover 2412 in cooperation with the front cover 2412.

  The second start-up door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the flat door 2424a, the arm 2414b extending downward from the door 2414a, and the lower end of the arm 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably mounted, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415. .

  The door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starter door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotation shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b.

  The second start port 2414 can close the second start port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (turns) about the rotation shaft 2414c by the advance / retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front / rear direction, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the front / rear direction, The start port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The start-up solenoid 2415 is attached with the direction in which the plunger protrudes forward. In the start port solenoid 2415, the plunger protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The first grand prize opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b that extend downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first grand prize winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotation shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending up and down of a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first big prize opening door 2417 can close the first big prize opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first grand prize opening door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c by the forward / backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front / rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The transmission member 2419 has a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a, and penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. In the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

  A plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first grand prize opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs on the first grand prize opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first big prize opening decoration board 2420 can make the first big prize opening 2005 emit light decoration by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

  In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is positioned above the second starter port 2004, and the door 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starter port 2004. It has become. That is, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward through 2411c. In this state, the door part 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize opening 2005, and the game part B cannot be received into the first big prize opening 2005 by the door part 2417a. It is in a state. That is, the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the first big prize opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2412a, and the door 2424a of the second start door 2414a After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and left by the inclination thereof. Roll toward you. If the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first grand prize opening 2005 is in contact with the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. It will contact alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzagging in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the door portion 2417a is discharged outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall 2412m. It rolls to the left by the inclination of the part 2412m and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h, and the second lateral wall portion 2412m It falls to the vicinity of the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned into the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that circulate on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game balls B that pass through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both first It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. The connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (the door portion 2414a side) of the arm portion 2414b of the second start-up door 2424b is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starter door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door 2414a moves rearward. Then, the door portion 2414a rotates so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the upper side of the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and is sent to the second start port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. A portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged backward from its rear end. The game ball B released backward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) lottery by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  As a result, the first grand prize opening door 2417 rotates so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward about the rotation shaft 2417c, and the front end of the door portion 2417a is rearward of the front surface of the unit base 2411. Will move. When the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big prize opening 2005 is entered. The game ball B can be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

  When the game ball B is received in the first grand prize opening 2005 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is open, the fifth standing wall is passed between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j. After being detected by one of the two first big prize opening sensors 2402 between the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth standing wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o, It falls on the three horizontal walls 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  Thus, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first big prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around a rotation shaft 2417c extending in the left and right directions at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second start port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second start port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big prize opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by a different first big prize mouth sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 is used. Since the game ball B can be prevented from staying between the first big prize opening 2005 and the first big prize opening sensor 2402, a large number of game balls can be obtained in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front. .

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-like peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction and a flat plate shape that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. A flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-like support portion 2503 projecting from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The peripheral wall 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. In addition, the support part 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall part 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 or a straight line so that the support part 2503 is not conspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is difficult to stand out from.

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support part 2503 provided above the warp inlet 2511 described later and the peripheral wall part 2501 projecting to the left most, the shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 at the part is the middle of the part extending vertically. Has a shape that bulges to the left. And the front end side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall part 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the part bulging to the left of the peripheral wall part 2501, and in the part bulging to the left of the peripheral wall part 2501, The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower side portions (see FIG. 135). The support part 2503 of this part is in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the part extending linearly up and down at the front end side of the support part 2503 is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Accordingly, since the front end side of the support portion 2503 matches the edge of the back left decorative body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind is relatively difficult. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

  Of the plurality of support portions 2503, the lower support portion 2503 of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrilateral shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support portion 2503 of this part is positioned in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is difficult to discriminate the support unit 2503 (see FIG. 111).

  The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that it can enter the front wall of the peripheral wall 2501 on the left side of the front view of the front panel of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp outlet 2512 that can be released from the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and opened in the frame on the rear side of the front of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the top of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 by rebounding the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is the panel plate of the game panel 1100. In a state of being attached to 1110, a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2513, a portion (central discharge portion 2513a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side discharge portion 2513b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released into the game area | region 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game balls B can flow. In a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner periphery of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006) and is driven to the right above the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction of about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape opened to the front, so that the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 that are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other on the left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to the left and right, and open obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B that are in contact with the stop portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and includes a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above and discharges it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens obliquely to the lower left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

  According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 on the back and the back unit through the frame of the center accessory 2500 It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

  Moreover, since the support part 2503 which protruded inward is provided in the site | part in which the flange part 2502 in the surrounding wall part 2501 is not provided, the intensity | strength of the surrounding wall part 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Moreover, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

  In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially with respect to the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back side where the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The center role 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center role 2500. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of a decorative body or the like provided on the rear side can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of a decorative body that can be decorated with light emission and the effect display device 1600, it can be decorated with light emission from them and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, a back front left effect unit 3700, an effect display device 1600 and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (cross hatched portion in FIG. 135). The light emitted forward from the LED on the front left decorative board 3714 in the back front rendering unit 3700, the rendering display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted or diffused to give a brilliant light emitting decoration. Can be shown to the player. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the back can be diffused by the step or the like, so that it can be seen more gorgeously.

  In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided in a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the vicinity, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be enlarged as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the original game can be enjoyed can be obtained.

  Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided on the entire periphery, the inside of the center accessory 2500 is more The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, when the non-circulation region (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is desired to be enlarged, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Anyway. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear in the front view.

  Note that the edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left rendering unit 3700 provided at the rear. Thereby, it can suppress that the support part 2503 differs from the decoration of the back and the support part 2503 conspicuously deteriorates the decoration of the back decoration body. Can be increased.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position near the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration is made by the lens effect. Although it has been shown that it is suppressed from being blurred, it is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. Intentionally, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided on the rear side may be blurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the peripheral portion 2501 may not have a rear portion inserted into the opening portion 1112. In this case, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening portion 1112. . Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 that does not have the opening portion 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the gaming panel 1100, and in this case, the flange portion 2502 is not provided in the center accessory 2500. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is the second attacker unit, side right middle unit in the front unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is disposed between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. The panel 1100 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The 2nd attacker unit 2600 is provided with the 2nd big prize opening 2006 opened so that opening and closing was possible toward the left (refer to Drawing 129).

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second major prize opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major prize opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an improper time acting near the second major prize opening 2006. 2602. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second grand prize opening door 2611 for closing the second big prize opening 2006 so that it can be opened and closed, and the second big prize opening door 2611 to move the second big prize opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second big prize opening door 2611, and the second big prize opening 2006 A guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it to the rear.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened leftward at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A prize opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second grand prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that touches the right end of the lower side and extends linearly upward, and bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape composed of an arcuate left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second grand prize opening door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding in a columnar shape rearward from a position away from the rotating shaft And a pin (not shown). The second big prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotary shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. A transmission member (not shown) has a base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second grand prize opening door 2611 can slide. A slit to be inserted, and is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second big prize opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500 Between the right side in 2501, the space which can distribute | circulate the game ball B is formed. Further, in the state where the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled in the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 is in a state where the second attacker solenoid 2612 is not energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second grand prize opening door 2611 stands upright, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is closed by the second big prize opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be received with respect to the second big prize opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) lottery by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the two-attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big prize opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second grand prize opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation shaft 2611a.

  As a result, the upper end of the second grand prize opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened leftward, and the right end side of the second big prize opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in the state which inclined like this. That is, the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second grand prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second big prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2601 and then guided by the guide passage 2613 and released backward. The game ball B released backward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The middle right side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012.

  The side right middle unit 2700 has a width corresponding to one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward, adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width corresponding to two balls B.

  Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 backward to the first guide passage 2701 and the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. And two guide passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001 and then bends to the right and further to the rear. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends backward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Yes.

  Further, the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space in which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is opened upward over substantially the entire area (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701 and then the rear side provided on the rear side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 is a rear unit provided at the rear after guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guide passage 2702. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 at 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. It has been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate part 2003 where a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second start port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate part 2003 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely downward from the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled to the game board 5, the extended line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located in the approximate center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, A gap in which the sphere B can flow is formed. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 just below the first guide passage 2521 and to the right of just above the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. The flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 115 and FIG. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. In the state assembled to the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outer side portions and the lower side portion of the center accessory 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it may approach to the portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than those. Thereby, the game ball B can be made to enter the warp inlet 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by driving the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 is more than the game ball B that circulates through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven from the left side to the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role 2500 N is guided to enter either the warp inlet 2511 of the center object 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 may be accepted. After the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, and is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly received in the first start port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not received in the general winning award port 2001 are discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first start port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged obliquely along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that the first start opening 2002 is received. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged in an oblique manner. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (received) the warp inlet 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central release portion 2513a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the first transfer port 3061 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, the first special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B that has been released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first start port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  Note that the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second start opening 2004, the first grand prize opening 2005, and the second big prize opening 2006. There is no possibility of being.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first start port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first grand prize winning opening 2005 and the second big winning prize opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the player to place the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left strike”).

  In the game board 5 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed at a strength with which the game ball B enters above a portion that decreases from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 toward the right. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). ), The game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate 2003 directly above.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is placed on the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided in order of decreasing probability, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 Is released downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged out of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

  The game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the side right middle unit 2700 has a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. The right side of the side right middle unit 2700 is occasionally received in the general winning opening 2001, or in rare cases is received in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600 is reached. Flow down to the left of.

  At this time, if the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize winning port 2006 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the back of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By the detection of the game ball B by the second big prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B that has not been accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 and has flowed down to the left of the second big prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide path 2530 of the center object 2500 and exits from the lower right guide path 2530. To the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward (obliquely left lower) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof. , To the left, and after rolling the fourth shelf 2412d from the door portion 2417a, it is discharged from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a but comes into contact with the upper shelf portion 2412p by contacting the obstacle nails N. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact and changing the direction downward and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to be first. It is discharged outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, the first large size depends on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first grand prize winning opening 2005 is opened. The winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

  Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the right end of the obstacle nail N or the upper shelf 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf 2412a may roll to the right against the inclination, and may be discharged to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a flows between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls to the left by the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and is not returned to the game area 5a, but the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the second start is performed when “normal hit” is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003. Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is received in the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are received. As a result, when the “big hit” is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 is moved and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that it is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the first big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  Note that, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b may flow downward to the lower right by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right by the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  A game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second start port 2004, the first grand prize port 2005, and the first sub-out port 2011. If not, the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a is discharged to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  For this reason, in order to open and close the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit” is made. Or the first special lottery result such as “big hit” or the second special lottery result needs to be drawn. While the first start port 2002 is always open, the second start port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B and draw (assign) the “normal hit” as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B at the second start opening 2004 is lower than that of the first start opening 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The operation of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. Can raise the expectation for the acceptance of.

  Then, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002, when “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B is opened and closed, the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” so that the game ball B can be received in the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006. A sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or second grand prize opening 2006 can be increased.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the gate portion 2003 can be easily passed by the guide passage to be distributed. Since it is easy to be received in the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right-handed”, there is a possibility that “normal hit” in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 may be drawn in lots. Since the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004 and there is a possibility that “small hit” or “big hit” may be drawn, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest Can do.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each main configuration. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and a box shape with the front open. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is provided at the front left end decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The rear guidance unit 3050 is provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The rear back left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. The front right effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and the front right effect unit 3700 provided between the front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 134. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side. The back box 3010 is formed of a synthetic resin in a transparent manner.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like.

  The back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Front left decorative body and front right decorative body]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 separately from each other on the left and right.

  The left front decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown in the drawings, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The front left decorative body 3030 is opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

  The front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed to be opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIGS. 111 and 135). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. It extends to.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is half from the bottom of the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back back left rendering unit 3500. It is extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the door window 101 a in the door frame 3.

  As a result, in the assembled state on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. 135). The elevating drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. Moreover, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Therefore, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (not visible) from the player side by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554, and the back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 is assembled in the game board 5. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but the upper half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3 by assembling the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost for the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit. Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided behind.

  On the other hand, the back right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back back right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back back right rendering unit 3600 when viewed from the front. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (player side). Accordingly, by making functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. And the same effect as the front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the back is covered. Therefore, it is difficult to see the functional parts from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Further, as described above, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent because the front left functional body 3030 and the front front right decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional parts provided behind. However, it is possible to make the functional component invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, can give the player a sense of openness, and can also provide an actual game area 5a. However, the game area 5a can be shown larger (wider) to the player. At this time, portions of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 to which a predetermined decoration is applied are located on the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be visually recognized from the front through the game area 5a, so that the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than the actual game, thereby attracting the player's attention strongly. It can be set as the board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as described above, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (player side) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. As a result, the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  It should be noted that functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided on the rear side are provided from the player side by a portion of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 that extends outward from the game area 5a. Since it cannot be visually recognized, all functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, when it is attempted to secure a space for providing all the functional components outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a risk that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional components is out of the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be made larger than the size of the game board 5 as in this embodiment It is desirable to provide it.

  In addition, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be a decoration related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in front view. Accordingly, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the front left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 extending from the game area 5a to the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 that can make 5a appear larger than the actual size and can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The entire back guiding unit 3050 is formed to be transparent.

  The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning port sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and Out-port sensor 3053 for detecting game ball B received in out-port 2010, second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub-out port 2012, and warp inlet 2511 of center accessory 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism.

  Further, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 inside the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general on the left side of the side unit 2200 The fourth delivery port 3064 through which the game ball B received at the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received through the second start port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The game balls B received at the five delivery ports 3065 and the first grand prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067 through which the game ball B received in the second big prize port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general prize port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 An eighth delivery port 3068 through which the received game ball B is delivered, and a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then ejects it downward, and a second receiving path. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 The third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and the position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066 And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after being guided leftward to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

  The game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and transferred to the first transfer port 3061 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path and then discharged downward. Is done. A game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second transfer opening 3062 and a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and transferred to the third transfer opening 3063 The ball B joins in the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064 is detected by the general winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path and then discharged downward. .

  It is received at the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth transfer port 3065 and received at the game ball B and the first big prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received to the second big prize port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge path.

  The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the portion communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then merges with the fourth discharge path. It is discharged through the four discharge paths.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006. In order to detect the gaming ball B received in the out-port 2010 opened at the lower end of the gaming area 5a among the gaming balls B that have not been received (the gaming ball B to which no privilege is given, also referred to as “out-ball”). belongs to.

  The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and a cylindrical portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can circulate, and the cylindrical portion 3081 A partition part 3082 that divides the inside into left and right parts, a flange part 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081, and a rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 are continued down the game ball B And a rear cover 3084 that can be guided and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 is substantially the same size as the out-port 2010, and the width in the left-right direction is a width in which two game balls B are sufficiently arranged (a width in which three game balls B are not arranged), and the lower inner surface is It inclines so that it may become low toward the back side. The partition portion 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and partitions the size so that one game ball B can pass through on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylinder portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylinder portion 3081. The game balls B that have been distributed are detected. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game ball B flowing through the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the site of the out-port sensor 3053, so that the out-game sensor B can be detected smoothly by the out-port sensor 3053. Can be quickly discharged and stagnation at the front side of the outlet sensor 3053 can be suppressed.

  In the state where the out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

  In the state where the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper portion of the front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 projects forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical part 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 in the game area 5a, and is then guided rearward by the out-guiding unit 1003 and received in the out-port 2010. The detected game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the inside of the cylindrical portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partitioning portion 3082, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is In addition to being able to guide to the left outlet sensor 3053 side, the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to “left-handed” or “right-handed” based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to enter the game that is intended by encouraging the optimal driving operation for the gaming situation.

  Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the forward projection of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, so when many game balls B enter the out-port 2010 per hour, The game ball B can be released to the left or right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B in the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without stagnation.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes downward from the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received in the second grand prize winning port 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detection member 3080 and is output by the out-port sensor 3053. It can prevent being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. And can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game area 5a is driven and the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006 are set. The game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of the above can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054. If the “out ball” is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning mouth, It can be notified that fraudulent acts are being carried out.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening. The number of “winning balls”, the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, it is possible to know the “running rate” in the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in the figure, a display unit for displaying the “delay rate” is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("all balls") thrown into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("all balls") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, so that only the “out ball” and the “winning ball” are detected. ”And“ whole ball ”can be compared to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Backward production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back behind effect unit.

  The back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost (the front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The rear rear effect unit 3100 has a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 includes a back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and has a translucent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface. A back rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back decorative board 3114 is a full color LED. The decoration body 3111 (back-back movable decoration body 3110) can be illuminated and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b on the back-side decoration board 3114.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending up and down on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending up and down on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable projection 3116a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking projection 3116b projecting triangularly from the vicinity of the upper end to the left, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 and a unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and extends vertically in parallel to the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 and spirals around the outer periphery. And a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  The rear rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotation shaft. The rear back drive motor 3126 is attached, the motor base 3127 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 in the vicinity of the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 and can be brought into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and whose lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131 A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by raising and lowering, a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110, It has.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear top detection sensor 3135 for detecting the detection piece 3116c of the back back movable decorative body 3110, a back back lower detection sensor 3136 for detecting the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and the back back. A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front side. The front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are attached to the lower front part of the front left cover 3137, are connected to the effect drive board 1720. Between the back-rear left relay board 3139 and the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138. A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the back movable ornament 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The slide shaft 3122 has an upper end and a lower end sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by a back rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is unable to rotate about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable projection 3116 a of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. The slide guide 3130 is configured such that the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can come into contact with the lower surface.

  The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved up and down only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a that protrudes to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b that protrudes to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar protrusion protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 is configured such that the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. In addition, the projecting pin 3131 c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133 a of the link member 3133.

  The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which the shape of the front view is chamfered at each vertex. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the front-rear direction near one vertex. The link member 3133 has a long hole-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis in the vicinity of the left apex from the rotation axis, and a long hole shape extending in the direction of the rotation axis in the vicinity of the upper apex from the rotation axis. A second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and in the left-right direction. Extending and tilting so as to move to the left as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, the contact surface 3134b with which the lower surface of the lock projection 3116b of the movable decorative body 3110 can contact, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 supports the right slider 3117 of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in cooperation with the unit base 3121.

  Next, the operation of the back rear effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back rear effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back back movable decorative body 3110 has moved upward, as shown in FIG. 140 (slide guide 3130). Is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and is positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. Since the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The urging force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis, and is urged in the direction in which the lock member 3134 slides to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, the back movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if any of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (problem), the remaining rear decorative ornament 3110 can be prevented from moving downward (falling). it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear back upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  The rear rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the rear upper effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is not visible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the back protrusion movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back back movement decoration body 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110.

  When the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back and bottom detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is moved to the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the rear back lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

  As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b is used. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable ornament 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable ornament 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back back lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back back drive motor 3126 stops.

  The fallen back movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the impact absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121 to stop the fall and enter the appearance position (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this appearance position state, the slide guide 3130 is positioned below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 does not come into contact therewith.

  In the state of the appearance where the back back movable decorative body 3110 has fallen, the back back movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side). In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back and back decorative board 3114, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. Players can be entertained with luminous decoration.

  When returning the back movable decorative body 3110 from the position where the lower moving end appears to the normal retracted position, the back shaft drive motor 3126 moves the spiral shaft 3123 in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view). The slide guide 3130 is moved upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. When the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position. Become.

  Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  When the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116 b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134 c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. The locking member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that is to be moved to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the locking projection 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the urging force of the spring 3132 and enters the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 is moved downward by the lock member 3134. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back movable movable body 3110 is detected by the back top detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back back drive motor 3126 stops. In this manner, the back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, which is a normal state.

  According to the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position that is visible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left, the lock is released. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Backside movable decorative body]
Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back and back movable decorative body together with the back and back decorative board. 143 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144A is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144B is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back and back movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back and back decoration board by broken lines in the front view of FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in FIG. (C) is a front view which shows a part of light guide radiation plate and back back decoration board | substrate in the same site | part as the decoration body of (a).

  FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143 (a) in an enlarged manner. 151 is an exploded view showing the sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board in the first LED portion, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the site | part which is carrying out from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the back of a back decoration board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back and back decorative substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a back view of the back and back decorative substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decoration part in a form different from FIG. It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of a decoration object which has a metal decoration part of a form still different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a left-right direction between two first decorative portions 3151 and two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each first decorative portion 3151 imitates a single cherry blossom. In addition, the second decorative portion 3152 is not shown in the figure, but each of them imitates a predetermined character and is arranged on the left and right to form a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. As described above, the back movable movable body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

  The back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. A transparent flat decorative body 3111 having a light transmitting property and a translucent decorative sheet with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150 3112, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. The back-side decorative board 3114, the flat-shaped decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-back decorative board 3114, and the decorative body 3111 A left slider 3116 extending vertically at the side, and a, and the right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side than the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative body 3111 is formed such that the front and rear general surfaces are flat. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes forward shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. A third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrudes forward shorter than the portion 3111b. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a site that is the outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the part of the first decorative part 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petal of the first decorative part 3151 that imitates cherry blossoms and on the part that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-way) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Moreover, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

  The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 156 (a))) protruding forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. In FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, there are dark shaded portions). The entire decoration body 3111 except the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a) and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at the curved front portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the first decoration protrusion 3111a. It is not provided in the side part. Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the back rear decoration board 3114 is made longer. It is possible to improve insulation against electrostatic discharge or short circuit.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, it is possible to give a high-class feeling due to the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided at a position in front of the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 as shown in FIG. The first LED housing portion 3113c is difficult to see from the front.

  In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is transmitted from the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Reflecting backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen.

  This metal decoration part 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by synthetic resin injection molding. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like protrudes facing upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate heated to a predetermined temperature and having elasticity on the lower surface are disposed above the base material of the decorative body 3111. . Then, the hot plate is lowered downward from the upper end of the first decorative projection 3111a in the base material of the decorative body 3111 to a position of a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative projection 3111b), and the hot plate The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing area FS1 above (front) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). .

  The hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion that comes into contact with the decoration body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet. Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil is in a good state even in a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil-pressed). Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, a large-scale installation is not required and can be formed easily, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamp device, the first decoration protrusion is lowered by lowering the hot plate to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c. A decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, in a state where the base material of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping apparatus, first, a hot plate is attached to the second decorative protrusion using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). The metal foil is lowered to a position lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transcript. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from that of the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The position is lowered to the position (first foil pressing area FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). Thereby, the decoration body 3111 provided with the metal decoration part 3111d of a different color is formed by the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b without performing a masking process on the base material of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeling) with a laser beam. You may make it form the decoration body 3111 which has the metal decoration part 3111d in the decoration protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided on the side portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recess 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereafter, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to resin sink during injection molding can be suppressed.

  The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. For this reason, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of a first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact, light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern and the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen.

  Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the rear concave portion 3111e is located in front of a first light diffusing portion 3112c and a second light diffusing portion 3112d, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 at the site of the rear recess 3111e, and therefore, the light irradiated from the front to the site of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is caused by the gap. Then, irregular reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e is brightened by light from the front. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not caused to emit light, the first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and can be easily seen from the front.

  Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding in a columnar shape from the rear surface to the rear. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a site directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereby, it is difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front (player side) by the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in a front portion of the mounting boss 3111f, and the mounting boss 3111f is difficult to visually recognize from the front due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body behind the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 has a pattern on the rear surface of a transparent resin sheet. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 and on the portion excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and a second contour portion 3112b provided in a portion between the first decorative protrusion 3111a formed in a double shape of the decorative body 3111; A first light diffusion portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second portion provided in a portion (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a that corresponds to the two decorative portions 3152 and that is provided double of the decorative body 3111. It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a portion behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a pattern part that imitates the cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative part 3151, and the remaining part is The light interference fringes are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed to be opaque. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. In addition, the part imitating the cherry blossom in the first contour part 3112a is colored using white or pink. Note that ink (paint) used for a pattern or the like may be one having glitter that glitters in the form of particles.

  The first contour portion 3112a is located on the rear side outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back movable ornament 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a part of the same color (golden in this embodiment) as the decorative part 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour part 3112a and the metal decorative part 3111d. Accordingly, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d, and to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back movable decoration body 3110.

  In addition, the first contour portion 3112a is formed in light gray or white on the rear surface side. As a result, the color of the picture and hologram on the front side is improved. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back movable ornament 3110 can be brightly decorated. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

  Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a is flat except for the rear recess 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  As illustrated, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided in the second decorative portion 3152 in the double of the decorative body 3111. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-shaped gold metal decoration portion 3111d, the double metal decoration portion 3111d is emphasized by the black color of the second contour portion 3112b. And the decoration effect of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

  The first light diffusion portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear skin-like pattern by a plurality of ridges that extend linearly in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like at one site of the first light diffusing unit 3112 c, in one petal of a cherry blossom culled by the first decorative unit 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, pink) are applied by printing so that the shade becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind is emitted to the first light diffusion portion 3112c, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusion portion 3112c slightly increases. As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the light emitting decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

  The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. This second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each second decorative portion 3152, as shown by the light and shaded shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. It has been. The second light diffusion portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusion portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed to be translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear is caused to emit light to the second light diffusing portion 3112d, the second light diffusing portion 3112d has a predetermined dot pattern according to the halftone dot pattern. The second decorative portion 3152 made of the above characters can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion on the inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a recess 3111e that is recessed forward. Accordingly, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front onto the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not caused to emit light, the first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and can be easily seen from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. The remaining part excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 in the part 3150 is constituted. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of a transparent sheet serving as a base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Moreover, the 1st light-diffusion part 3112c and the 2nd light-diffusion part 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 are formed by sticking a predetermined | prescribed light-diffusion film (diffuser film). The first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

  The transmission part 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to be transparent. Since the transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light transmitting radiation plate 3113 emits light from the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface side remains transparent, so the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the rear through the transmission portion 3112e. The light irradiated to the outside leaks from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. For this reason, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the first decoration protrusion 3111a (metal decoration part 3111d) is lit by the light transmitted through the transmission part 3112e. Further, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern and hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed in substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram can be decorated up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111. The decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 can be shown large. Further, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decoration body 3110 is not trimmed, so that the back movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a sense of unity, It is possible to give the player a visual impact and attract attention, and to enjoy a large decoration, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site | part which becomes the back of the metal decoration part 3111d. Thereby, when the back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transmission portion 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. The appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration projection in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decoration projection 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the part located behind the part 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the part of the first contour part 3112a, and the metal decorative part 3111d is used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate with movable decorative body behind back]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted, and the main body portion 3113a penetrate in the front-rear direction and A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The leg portion 3113f protruding backward from the periphery of the 3113c and the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f are opposite to each other. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h that extends downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back and back decoration board 3114 in a state assembled to the back and back movable decoration body 3110.

  As for the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c, the inner peripheral shape is formed in the rectangle. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind a portion with low transparency in the decorative portion 3150 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the part of the first decorative part 3151, a plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c are provided behind the part of the first light diffusing part 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shade is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided at the site of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals with cherry blossoms. And the center of the long side whose inner periphery is a rectangle is provided so that it may be located on the centerline of a petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided at the site of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In addition, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113 c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the site of the second decorative portion 3152. When the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c), the first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other. It is formed in the state. By connecting the approaching first LED housing portions 3113c to each other, it is possible to avoid the formation of a portion that is thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  By the way, the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and has penetrated the main-body part 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED housing 3113c, A part is reflected straight by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c toward the inner side of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. It will be emitted to the inside of 3113c. And when the light radiated | emitted from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c arrives at another surface of an inner peripheral surface, in the said surface, a part will be 1st LED accommodating part 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. In other words, light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a within the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED storage 3113c when attempting to pass through the first LED storage 3113c. The light that has passed through the first LED housing portion 3113c is reflected by a portion of the inner circumferential surface and a portion of the inner circumferential surface that enters the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, respectively. The amount of light is greatly reduced as compared with that before passing.

  For this reason, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a can be blocked by the first LED housing 3113c. Since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light that attempts to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the region where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is obtained by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152. It is possible to prevent light from being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 and decorate with light, and it is possible to reliably decorate only the desired second decorative portion 3152 with a plurality of second decorative portions 3152. .

  The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, “☆”. Are provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided as described above. In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is a single hole. Thereby, in the main-body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin part which is easy to break is not formed. In this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the light emission of “☆” arranged below “I” are provided below “☆”. For this reason, if the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” is illuminated, the “I” provided above “☆” may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of “☆”. An extended portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper side of “☆” is provided in the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a for decorating a part of “I” is decorated. ing. By this extending part 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) light from the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” by being directed to the “I” side. Thus, even if “☆” is decorated with light emission, “I” is not illuminated with decoration. In addition, the extension part 3113j can reduce (block) the light for decorating “I” to be guided to the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” and “☆” can be surely decorated with light emission, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions simulating stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 simulating cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms and a circular portion simulating a stamen that is located on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the petal centerline.

  The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, A part is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, since the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, FIG. 153 (b) shows. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d. The petals can be brightly decorated with light.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed as a square pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly radiate light emitted in the direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the back is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

  In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of the portion facing the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c on the first LED housing portion 3113c side. Thereby, the area of the light receiving unit 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated into the main body 3113a. Can do. Further, when the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along a side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

  The right slider front portion 3113h is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the decorative body base 3115.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and to prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the back decorative substrate 3111d is provided from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and static electricity accumulated in metal decoration portion 3111d flows to back back decoration board 3114, and back back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED housing portion 3113c is housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c. Heat from the second LED 3114b accommodated in the LED 3114a or the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back and back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

  Moreover, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front side of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. 1st LED accommodating part 3113c and 2nd LED accommodating part compared with the case where it forms in the bottomed concave shape (groove shape) which does not penetrate 1st LED accommodating part 3113c and 2nd LED accommodating part 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, the rapid temperature rise by the heat | fever from the accommodated 1st LED 3114a and 2nd LED 3114b can be relieved, and the thermal influence with respect to back back decoration board | substrate 3114 etc. can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c having the first LED housing portion 3113c and the extending portion 3113j that are connected to each other in close proximity, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is increased. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a or to alleviate the rapid temperature rise.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. Thereby, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decorative board 3114 is suppressed and the influence of heat. Can be reduced.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the back decorative substrate 3114, and the front part of the rear surface of the main body part 3113a is fronted by the reflecting part 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even at a portion where the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is not provided behind the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the back decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be further increased. The creeping distance EL from the front metal decorative part 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-side decorative board of back-back movable decorative body]
A plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114 a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114 b are mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat substrate body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154 and the like) that is provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the substrate body 3114c, respectively, and forms a predetermined circuit pattern. And an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

  Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, the back decorative board 3114 is not shown in the figure, but a notation portion in which the mounted component is written in the vicinity of the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic component 3114e. have. The notation part is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is not easily noticeable from above the coating film.

  The back decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the flange portion 3113b, The size is formed to be substantially constant. Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and there is a slight gap between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed in a size that is formed uniformly. That is, the back decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decorative body base 3115.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, at the site of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is placed on the center line of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower in the vicinity of the tip on the inner side of the (metallic decoration portion 3111d). Thereby, each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms can be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a at the site of the first decorative portion 3151.

  Moreover, in the site | part of the 2nd decoration part 3152 in several 1st LED3114a, in each of each 2nd decoration part 3152 arranged in the left and right, the 1st decoration protrusion provided in double of the decoration body 3111 In the vicinity of the rear of 3111a, light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Thereby, the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged on the left and right sides can be illuminated and decorated one by one by the first LED 3114a at the site of the second decoration portion 3152.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a central portion imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 and is a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of five petals. It is provided in the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal simulating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. Thereby, the 5 LED which imitated the stamen of the center part in the 1st decoration part 3151 can be light-emitting decorated by 2nd LED3114b, respectively.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion simulating the stamen of the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is changed from other portions. Can also emit point light with high brightness, and can attract the player's interest strongly. Therefore, in the light emission decoration of the decoration part 3150, since the site | part light-emitted by 1st LED3114a and the site | part light-emitted by the 2nd LED 3114b can be provided, by combining those light emission suitably. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  The substrate body 3114 c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and constitutes a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c to the inside by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in this embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creeping distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member outside the back decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d are earned, and discharge such as static electricity Insulation against short-circuiting can be improved, and damage to the back decorative board 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  Further, the outer periphery of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to a portion on the inner side by a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. And the cooling effect with respect to the electronic component 3114e can be heightened, and the damage by heat can be prevented.

  Further, the back decorative board 3114 has a predetermined area for facilitating the reflection of light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the board body 3114c to the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. The light reflection assisting region 3114f (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection assisting region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, as compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, The angle of the light emitted from the one LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f becomes an angle that approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. Can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since it is made to contact | abut, the leg part 3113f can be lengthened back by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving part 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (light quantity) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is increased, so that the back movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be brightly decorated.

  Further, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the auxiliary light reflection region 3114f (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg 3113f is worn or worn, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing. Accordingly, the insulation is lowered by the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back and back decorative board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the back and back movable decorative body 3110 so that a flange portion 3115b to be described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are assembled. With 3113b, since the outer periphery is doubled, the outer peripheral surface becomes difficult to see from the outside, and the appearance is prevented from deteriorating. Further, in a state where the back back decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back back decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b from behind, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back decorative substrate 3114 causes the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to exist due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. The creeping distance EL can be made longer because of meandering so as to wrap around, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back and back decoration board 3114, and the back and back decoration board 3114 is damaged. This can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creeping distance EL is a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

  In addition, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, a member (in this embodiment, provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back rear decorative substrate 3114. The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from reliably performing a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back rear decorative substrate 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back rear movable decoration. Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

  Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, the back and back decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the back surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-back movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 that cannot be seen from the front, there is no need to apply a paint of a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, The cost for the back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of movable body behind the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a covering the rear side of the back decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from a right end in front view of the cover plate portion 3115a.

  The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a is a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. The size is formed. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the rear side of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the back and back decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back and back decorative substrate 3114 from the rear. It is possible to prevent the back decorative substrate 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is more forward than the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Protrudes so that is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside and improving the appearance. In addition, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back back decorative substrate 3114 in the state assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 may meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Accordingly, the creepage distance EL can be further increased, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing into the back and back decoration board 3114 and damaging the back and back decoration board 3114.

  The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-like portion that is long to the left and right, and a portion that opens larger than the slit-like portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released to the outside of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

  In addition, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are disposed so as to abut on a portion where the copper foil 3114d in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . Accordingly, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of back and rear movable decorative body]
Next, main effects of the back movable ornament 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration body. The attachment boss 3111f of the decoration body 3111 is assembled by being attached to the decoration body base 3115 with the back and back decoration board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). Thereby, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on a transparent flat decorative element 3111, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern and interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable movable body 3110 has a The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a stereoscopic effect, and the lens effect by the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A depth feeling can be imparted by the hologram. Thereby, even if the thickness of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 is thin, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect by the decorative portion 3150 of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. Demonstrate and entertain the player.

  In addition, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour part 3112a, and the like can provide a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. Thereby, since the space concerning installation of the back movable ornament 3110 can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 can be increased, and a more effective part inside the game board 5 can be achieved. The back movable ornament 3110 can be provided to facilitate the implementation of the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Moreover, since the back movable movable body 3110 can be thinned, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies, so that by providing other decorative bodies, Providing the pachinko machine 1 with good appearance and providing the pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of performances. Providing the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the player and can be differentiated more. can do.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 that forms the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a, a stereoscopic effect can be imparted to the metal decoration part 3111d and a high-class feeling can be imparted. As a result, when the back movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position that cannot be visually recognized by the player to the visually appearing position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, thereby giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. Therefore, the decoration up to the outer peripheral edge of the decoration body 3111 can be performed, and the decoration of the back movable decoration body 3110 can be shown large. Further, since the back movable movable body 3110 has the decorative sheet 3112 substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back back movable decorative body 3110 is not trimmed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, thereby providing a sense of unity. Can be shown to the player, can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, can enjoy a large decoration, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at the rear part of the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second It is possible to make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front by the two contour portions 3112b, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 and to fully exhibit the decoration effect.

  Furthermore, since the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152, the first decoration portion 3151 is provided. And the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right can be sequentially decorated with light emission, or only the specific first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be decorated with light emission. By appropriately decorating the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 is irradiated with light in the direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side view type first LED 3114a. Since light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be made longer. Thereby, since the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, the decorative body 3111 can be obtained even if the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin. Further, the decoration sheet 3112 can be uniformly lit and illuminated uniformly, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent decoration having a good appearance. In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, so that the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be thinned and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is a top view type, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ) In the light emission decoration (light emission effect), it is possible to add a portion that emits light with a high brightness and a point shape by the second LED 3114b to a portion that is light-decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that the optimum light emission effect according to the gaming state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained, and the game It is possible to increase the expectation for the player, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The part 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body part 3113a. Thus, by providing the first LED housing 3113c at a position where the first LED 3114a is desired to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired site can be brightly decorated with more lighting effects. It is possible to entertain the player with high luminous decoration.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back back decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the housing portion 3113d is provided, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, so that the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is placed on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in contact with the front surface of the back back decorative substrate 3114, and between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap. The influence of heat can be reduced by suppressing the temperature rise.

  In addition, the back movable movable body 3110 can form a gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back back decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since it has the part 3115c, the surface of the back back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back back movable decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature increase of the back decorative substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so that the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (back rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature. The frequency (probability) that is executed may be increased. Thus, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, whereby the surface of the back and back decorative board 3114 can be ventilated, and the back and back decorative board 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

  Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back decorative substrate 3114 is guided and emitted by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since the winding meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration substrate 3114, and the back decoration substrate 3114d. It is possible to prevent 3114 from being damaged.

  Moreover, since the back back movable decorative body 3110 is configured to provide the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back back decorative board 3114 at a position away from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. The creepage distance EL and the spatial distance can also be increased by the predetermined distance SL, and the insulation against the discharge and short circuit such as static electricity can be enhanced, and the damage of the back decorative substrate 3114 due to the discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration part 3111d is smaller than the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Accordingly, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back decorative substrate 3114, the influence can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by driving the back rear drive motor 3126. For this reason, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like every time the elevator moves up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the movable movable body 3110 behind the back are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 are formed. Static electricity accumulated throughout is not easily discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration part 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration part 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment is likely to accumulate static electricity in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. However, as described above, from the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the creeping distance EL to the back back decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back back decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and a movable effect that the back back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, and the back back movable decorative body It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is decorated with light emission.

  In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d in which static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3160, the back-back movable decorative body 3170, the back-back movable decorative body 3180, etc. of the embodiment different from the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are mainly described with reference to FIG. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing, in section, the configuration of the back-back movable decorative body of the second embodiment different from the back-back movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and (b) is the back-back movable body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration body in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

  The rear back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the rear side of a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a decorative body 3161 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (a). A sheet-like decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decoration sheet 3162 to radiate light in a direction along the front surface inside, and a light guide radiation plate A back-and-back decorative board 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate light in a direction along the front surface with respect to the inside of the 3163 is mounted on the front surface.

  The decorative body 3161 of the back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed on a transparent sheet. In the decorative sheet 3162, a portion with low transparency in decoration is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the back decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). As a result, the LED 3164a is hidden from view from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as that of the decorative sheet 3162. The LED housing 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear and a plurality of rear surfaces are provided. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a quadrangle along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular shape in cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centering on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward in the same manner as the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable ornament 3110 described above. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The back-side decorative board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a that are inserted into the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from the back. Although not shown, the back and back decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position on the front and back surfaces inside the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative substrate 3164. The back decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the back movable movable body 3160 of the present embodiment is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. Further, the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Thereby, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the back movable decorative body 3160 is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. Thus, in the back movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, and it is difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces from the outside. It looks good.

  Since this back movable movable body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back and back decoration board 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back and back decoration board 3164, and the back and back decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be achieved. In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (b), the rear back movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer decorative body 3171 and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame A light-transmitting plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes the inner inner surface, and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and that radiates light in the direction along the entire surface in the interior. A back and back decoration board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a that irradiate light in the direction along the front surface with respect to the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is mounted.

  An outer decorative body 3171 of the back rear movable decorative body 3170 is a frame-shaped main body 3171a extending forward and backward, a support 3171b projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 3171a, and a main body 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface. The distance from the front end of the main body 3171a to the front surface of the support 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. This metal decoration part 3171c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the inner decoration body 3172 has a relief-like decoration with irregularities. The inner decoration body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed in substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a quadrangle along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and a plurality of the reflecting portions 3173b are provided concentrically. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the LED housing portions 3173a, each of which is determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable ornament 3110 described above. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decorative board 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back-side decorative board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a that are inserted into the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from the rear side. Although not shown, the back and back decorative board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative board 3174 on the front and rear surfaces. The back decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the rear back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment has an inner decorative body 3172 fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. Are substantially coincided with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back rear movable decorative body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is disposed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. Thereby, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In the back movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative board 3174. In the back rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171. It is hard to see and improves the appearance.

  Since the back rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the back rear movable decorative body 3170 is separated from the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body 3171a. The creeping distance EL to the back rear decorative board 3174 (the copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back rear decorative board 3174, and the back rear decorative board 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape, and an inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181. An inner decorative body 3182 having a light-transmitting property and a plurality of LEDs 3183a which are provided behind the inner decorative body 3182 and can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface. And.

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the rear movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c that is covered. The metal decoration portion 3181 c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner periphery of the flange portion 3181b, and the rear from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the bottom. Although not shown in the drawing, the main body 3182a has a relief-like decoration with irregularities formed on substantially the entire surface.

  The back decorative board 3183 has an outer shape that is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. The back decorative board 3183 has a plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back and back decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on a portion of the front and back surfaces inside the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative substrate 3183. The back decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the back and back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment has an inner decorative body 3182 and a back and back decorative substrate 3183 inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The back rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and a flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the outer decorative body 3181. It extends backward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is not visible from the outside by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3180 is provided with a flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 provided inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c. Since the outer periphery of the back and back decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182, the back and back decorative substrate 3183 (the copper of the back and back decorative substrate 3183c is provided. The creeping distance EL up to the (foil) can be a sufficient distance to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c from flowing into the back decoration board 3183 and damaging the back decoration board 3183. can do.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the main-body part 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. FIG. In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back back decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the lower back right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded view of the lower back left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front.

  The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the back bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 in the assembled state on the game board 5, from the front. Visible through the transparent gaming panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The back bottom left rendering unit 3200 is provided behind the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 having a translucent shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward and the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201. A back lower left decorative body 3202, a rear lower left decorative board 3203 provided behind the back lower left decorative body 3202, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear lower left decorative board 3203 behind A back base left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and a back bottom left decorative body 3202 is attached; and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear rendering unit 3100; It is equipped with.

  The lower back left rendering unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotary shaft protrudes backward, and to the rotary shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 that meshes with the drive gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and a first transmission gear 3207. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the back rotating left rotating decorative body 3201. The third transmission gear 3209 having a spur gear shape is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to penetrate the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decorative body 3202 is rotated so that the two petals of the same size as the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 overlap each other and the rear petal is positioned between the front petals. It is formed in the shape that was made to.

  In the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back bottom left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a protrudes backward through the unit base 3204. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment passes through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 can light up and decorate the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 by causing a plurality of LEDs on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to emit light.

  Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back lower right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 having translucency with the shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward, and the rear lower right rotation decoration body 3251. A back lower right decorative body 3252, a back lower right decorative board 3253 which is provided behind the back lower right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear lower right decorative board 3253 The back lower right decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and the back lower right decorative body 3252 is attached. The unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear rendering unit 3100. It is equipped with.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back lower right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and a first transmission gear 3257. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a rear transmission gear 3258 that is meshed with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right rotating decorative body 3251. And a third transmission gear 3259 having a spur gear shape and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the right lower decorative body 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower right decorative body 3251 is formed to penetrate the back lower right decorative body 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back lower right decorative body 3252 rotates two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 so that the rear petal is positioned between the front petals after being overlapped on the front and rear. It is formed in the shape that was made to.

  In the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The back bottom right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes backward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253. In the state in which the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back-bottom right drive motor 3255, the back-bottom right rendering unit 3250 according to the present embodiment is connected via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the back lower right effect unit 3250 can light-decorate the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 by causing a plurality of LEDs on the back lower right decorative board 3253 to emit light.

[5-9f. Production unit under the back]
Next, the back-under-stage production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back-under-middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle lifting mechanism of the rear lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower middle lifting mechanism of the lower lower middle production unit viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle decorative body unit of the back lower middle production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle production unit from the rear. FIG. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising / lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising / lowering mechanism in the lower back middle production unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor with a table | surface. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front.

  The back-under middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The under back middle production unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250. The lower back middle production unit 3300 includes a lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 having a back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a lower back middle up / down lifting mechanism that moves the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 up and down. 3350.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 has a front hexagonal shape. This underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six number decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is circular at every 60 degrees in the clockwise direction centering on the center. It is arranged on the circumference. This under back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate a diffusion lens 3321, a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, and a front end side of the board fixing member 3323 in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 described later. Have.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the diffuser lens 3321 and the diffuser lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310. A backside middle first decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the diffusion lens 3321 so as to sandwich the back bottom middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side, and protrudes in a columnar shape to the rear. The substrate fixing member 3323 having the shaft portion 3323a and the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 have a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rotation is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 A base 3324.

  The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and thus has translucency. A back bottom middle decorative body 3328, a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329 provided behind the back bottom middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329. A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that can detect the area detecting piece 3325 and a position specifying the position detecting piece 3326 that is attached to the front face of the second lower middle decorative board 3329. Sensor 3331.

  The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotary shaft protrudes forward, and is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333. A spur gear-like drive gear 3334 meshing with the rotation gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-under middle lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360.

  The front end side of the diffuser lens 3321, the lower back middle decorative board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323, in the assembled state, is positioned between the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotary base 3324, It is in a state of being accommodated in the recess 3311 of the rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the lower back first decorative board 3322, it is possible to light up and decorate the numeral decoration (relief) portion of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310. The LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is a full color LED. In addition, the LED on the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is a full color LED.

  The region detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 includes “3”, “4”, and “5” between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Through the numeral decoration, it is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees with the rotation axis as the center, between the numeral decorations “5” and “6”.

  Each of the plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the region detection piece 3325. Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each position detection piece 3326 is positioned at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape in a range of a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. An interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). .

  A plurality (three in this case) of area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at an angle interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are “3”, “4”, “5” in a state where the decoration of “1” of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has elevating pins 3332a protruding in a columnar shape from the lower part of the rear surface to the rear. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotational drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotational position.

  This back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotational drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can do. Further, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to emit light. In addition, the lower back inner decorative body 3328 can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends to the left and right and is attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 at both ends, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle up / down drive motor 3352 is mounted on the front surface of the rear base, and the back bottom middle up / down drive motor 3352 is mounted on the rotary shaft of the back lower middle up / down drive motor 3352 and a part of the flat is facing the front side of the unit base 3351. A gear-shaped drive gear 3353, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a first transmission gear 3354. Spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of unit base 3351, and second transmission gear A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with 355, and a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. And an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably mounted at the center upper portion.

  Further, the bottom back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a base end side extending in the left-right direction rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted. A first slit 3357a that extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and a second slit 3357b in which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. And an elevating arm 3357 having a detecting piece 3357c provided at the tip, and a back / under middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detecting piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided. And a lower back middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending lift slit 3359a through which the lift pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 are inserted, and a front cover 3359 are attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward (front) (Clockwise direction with respect to view) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower back middle raising / lowering drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is attached so that its proximal end is on the right side of the lifting cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356. The lift arm 3357 has a distal end extending leftward from the lift cam gear 3356.

  The back bottom middle relay board 3358 includes a back bottom middle first decorative board 3322, a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329, a region specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a back bottom middle rotary drive motor 3333, and a back bottom middle lift drive motor. 3352, the connection between the back / under middle lifting detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the lifting slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The raising / lowering pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 are slidably inserted into the raising / lowering slits 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided to the right of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. By the elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide straight up and down.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back / under middle lifting / lowering drive motor 3352, the back / under middle lifting / lowering mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356 a of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b revolving by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the lift pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is in the lowered position where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 has moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has the distal end side positioned below the base end side, and the front end detection piece 3357c is moved under the back lower middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution, and is located in the vicinity of the proximal end in the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . More specifically, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. Thus, even if an urging force is applied to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Therefore, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring The urging force of 3362 does not act on the back / under lift driving motor 3352 via the lifting / lowering arm 3357 or the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. Thus, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 is moved in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lifting arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

  In the normal state, the back middle production unit 3300 has the number decoration located on the uppermost side among the plurality of number decorations in the middle back decoration 3310 inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be seen well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 etc.). In a normal state, the numeral decoration located on the lowermost side is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second lower middle By causing the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329 to emit light, the first starter port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be decorated with light emission in addition to the light emitting decoration of the back and middle rotating decorative body (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back / upper middle lifting drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are interposed. Thus, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm It will rotate clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side of 3357 moves upward.

  As the elevating arm 3357 rotates in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves upward through the lifting pins 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides toward the proximal end in the first slit 3357a. At this time, since the urging force in the clockwise direction is applied to the lifting arm 3357 by the spring 3362, the urging force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and the lower back middle The load applied to the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the proximal end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 is stopped simultaneously with the drive. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the uppermost position.

  In the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the line of force of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b that is in contact. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decorative body. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the back / under lift driving motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3357 or the like.

  In the state where the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b is brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is rotated by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lifting arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

  In the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in addition, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located on the upper side of the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents rebound from the outside to the inside of the center frame (circumferential wall portion 2501), and forward (player) From the side), all of the numeral decorations can be visually recognized (see FIG. 201).

  In the case of returning the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the lowered position from the state where it is moved to the raised position, if the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352, the lift arm 3357 is moved. Rotates counterclockwise, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lower back middle lifting detection sensor 3358a of the lower back middle relay board 3358, the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 stops the rotation of the drive gear 3353. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position (in addition, the center for preventing the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501). The rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1.

  The under back middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the back under middle decoration body unit 3320, so that the under back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette. The lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 at any position such as the lowered position and the raised position of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320.

  In the normal state, the back-under-middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment is such that one of a plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the back-under-middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned immediately above the rotation center (stop position). is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the state where the number decoration of “1” in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is positioned above, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is identified as the first area. While detecting by the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 are detected by the position specifying sensor 3331. Is not detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three region specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, the numeral decoration “1” is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of the range of ± 30 degrees.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the numeral decoration “2” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration “3” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration “4” is a range of an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located in.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration “5” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration “6” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  As described above, any number decoration is determined by the combination of detection / non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. It can be known (detected) whether it is located in the stop area including.

  Since the backside middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, the backside middle rotation drive is performed when the region identification sensor 3330 rotates 30 degrees after the region detection piece 3325 is detected. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position area by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specification sensor 3331. Thus, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the desired number decoration at the stop position for the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three region specifying sensors 3330 stop at the desired stop. In a combination that satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted from the first region specifying sensor 3330a in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees. ing. In this state, the desired number is away from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α / 2 degrees (here 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when rotating from there (from the origin) and β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, so that a desired number can be obtained. The decoration can be accurately stopped at the stop position.

  In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 has been described by the angle, but the rotation stop may be performed by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 formed of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates 13 steps in a combination in which the three region specifying sensors 3330 satisfy a desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 is Apart from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. When the position detection sensor 3331 is rotated 20 steps from the angle at which the position detection sensor 3331 has not been detected, the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, thereby stopping the desired numeral decoration. It can be stopped accurately at the position.

  Next, a description will be given of the light-emitting decoration in the back-under-stage effect unit 3300. As shown in FIG. 169, the back lower middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 for emitting and decorating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. A decorative substrate 3322 and a lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are provided. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are positioned behind the six number decorations in the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310, and each of the number decorations can be decorated with light emission independently.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs on the back bottom middle second decorative board 3329 are located behind the plurality of numeral decorations on the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 and are located outside the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310. The periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the under-underground effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the under-below under rotation decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating the plurality of LEDs on the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back as appropriate, it is rotated in a state where only specific numeral decorations are light-decorated or in a state where each numeral decoration is decorated with different colors. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  In addition, in the state where the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is located behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. The first start port 2002 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED in the corresponding portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first start port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the LED on the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back bottom is emitted (or one of the plurality of emission modes is determined to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions to detect the region of the length over the three stop positions. A piece 3325, six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, a three-region specifying sensor 3330 for detecting the region detection piece 3325, and one position specifying for detecting the position detection piece 3326 Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325 decrease after sequentially increasing from one side in the rotation direction. All the area specifying sensors 3330 are once detected as non-detection even during the time until the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is detected by detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions with as few as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be performed by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotational speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the fast rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface. Such an effect can be shown to the player, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position The number of the stop decorations of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 becomes the same, and the ability (grasping of the stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. Under the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310, the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be set. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with (under) the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9g. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the main production member as seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit as seen from the rear. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decoration body unit in the back-stage production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decoration body unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the front front rotating decorative body in the back effect unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back / up / down decorative body unit in the back / facing effect unit from the front, and FIG. 176 (b) is the back side with the back / up / down decorative body unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front in a state where the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back effect stage unit.

  The back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back top production unit 3400 includes a back top front rotating decorative body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top front rotating decorative body 3410. A front upper decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right directions through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left and right direction, and a rear surface provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface provided behind the front upper decorative body 3421 The front decoration board 3422 and the back upper front decoration board 3422 are provided at the rear, and the front front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front surface, and the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decoration body 3410 is rotatably supported. A unit base 3423.

  Further, the rear effect unit 3400 is provided between the rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotational axis is on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Meshing with the drive gear 3426, a spur gear-like drive gear 3426 attached to the rotating shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, which is mounted so as to protrude into the space A rotating gear 3427 having a detection piece 3427a which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the front rotating front decorative body 3410 in a spur gear shape and projects forward, and a back front decorative board 3422 And a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 which is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, the back top production unit 3400 includes a back top lift drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back top lift drive. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. And a lift cam gear 3431 which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a and is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. The detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 that is attached to the rear surface of the front front decorative substrate 3422 is detected. The rear end of the rear cover 3424 is moved back and forth so that the front end side on which the rear upper / lower lift detection sensor 3432 and the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 are provided is moved up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431. A back-up / down decoration unit 3450 that is rotatably attached to the axis of the back, and a spring 3433 that urges the back-up / down decoration unit 3450 to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves upward, And a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulates the upward movement of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 has a back top back decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440 a protruding rearward from the center of the back surface of the back back rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates in the center. A body 3451, a back rear decoration board 3452 which is provided behind the back upper decoration body 3451 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear upper decoration body 3451 from the rear of the back upper decoration board 3451. Is mounted on the front surface, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440 a of the back and rear rotating decorative body 3440.

  Further, the back upper and lower decorative body unit 3450 includes a rear rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the lift unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the rotation shaft of the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. A spur gear-like drive gear 3455 attached to the first gear, a spur gear-like first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a spur gear-like rotation gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back up / down decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the up / down unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458 from the rear. 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The front back rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 passes through the back front front decorative body 3421, the back front front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the rear side of the unit base 3423. It extends to the space between the cover 3424. The front back decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotating decorative body 3410 in the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are placed between the front petals. It has the decoration of the shape rotated so that it may be located in. The entire back upper decorative body 3421 has translucency.

  The front back decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By causing the LED on the back front decorative substrate 3422 to emit light, the back front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

  The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which a back rotation detection sensor 3428 and a back lift detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the front front rotating decorative body 3410, and has a circular arc shape through which the columnar support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting / lowering unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that protrudes backward through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 passes through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453 in the back lift decorative body unit 3450. In addition, the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by a back lift detection sensor 3432 that protrudes rearward through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423.

  The back and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the rear upper rear decorative body 3451, the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3453, and the lifting unit base 3453, and is moved up and down. It extends to the rear side. The back upper decorative body 3451 rotates two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 so that the rear petal is positioned between the front petals after being overlapped on the front and rear. It has a decorative shape. The entire back upper decorative body 3451 has translucency.

  The back upper back decoration board 3452 can light up and decorate the back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light. The LED on the back-side back decorative substrate 3452 is a full-color LED.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and a shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. A drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating cherry blossoms on the front.

  Next, the movements of the back front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back top lifting decoration body unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back top production unit 3400 has a detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the front front rotation decorative body 3410 detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 has one petal facing upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back front rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, in a normal state, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 provided with the back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 on the front end side is in a state extending in the left-right direction, and the whole excluding the front end side, It is in a retracted position that is located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and cannot be seen from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). In addition, the part which protrudes to the left rather than the back upper front ornament 3421 of the back up / down ornament body unit 3450 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lift detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and is located near the end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

  Specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point with the slit 3453 b in the drive pin 3431 b of the elevating cam gear 3431 extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. Thus, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward by the weight of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450, The force line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, and therefore the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back lifting elevator unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with an end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a of the slit 3453b. Accordingly, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight, the lifting cam gear 3431 is counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b contacts the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back elevation drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward by the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above a straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b is moved. It slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back lifting drive motor 3429 and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. Revolution stops.

  Thereby, the counterclockwise rotation of the back lifting ornament body unit 3450 via the lifting unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back lifting ornament body unit 3450 including the back rear back decoration body 3440 is moved. Then, the appearance position moves downward from the front upper decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176 (b)). In this appearance position state, the front end side of the backside lifting decorative body unit 3450 is located below the center of the backside front decorative body 3421, so that the backside rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visible from the front. It becomes possible.

  In the state where the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to turn the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 further counterclockwise due to its own weight, the force line of the force hits the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. , And the weight of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

  In addition, in the state where the back lifting elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with an end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a of the slit 3453b. Accordingly, when the lifting unit base 3453 further rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b contacts the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 is locked, and the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In a state in which the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be viewed from the front. In the back up / down decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back up / down rotation drive motor 3454, the back / upside back rotation decoration via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front and the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotating driving motor 3454, the rotating back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be viewed. .

  When the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is lifted / lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the direction opposite to the above by the back lifting driving motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the front end side of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. And if the detection piece 3431c of the raising / lowering cam gear 3431 is detected by the back upper / lower raising / lowering detection sensor 3432, the back raising / lowering decorative body unit 3450 will be made into a retracted position by stopping rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back upper / lower raising / lowering drive motor 3429. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, The load applied to the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the back top rendering unit 3400 of this embodiment is provided with a back top front decorative board 3422 behind the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back top front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative board 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back upper back decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back upper back decoration body 3440 and the back upper back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper back decoration board 3452 are appropriately illuminated. By doing so, the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 can be decorated with light emission.

  At this time, in the state in which the back lifting elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED on the back back rear decoration board 3451 is caused to emit light, thereby the back top back rotating decoration that has been decorated with light emission. The player can show the body 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451 to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear perspective left decorative body unit of the back rear left performance unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear back left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back back left decorative unit in the back back left effect unit.

  The back rear left rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the left side of the back rear rendering unit 3100 near the left end in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500 has a translucent back back left rotating decorative body 3510 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back back left rotating decorative body 3510 that rotatably supports the lower back side. A rear left decorative unit 3520 and a rear rear left drive unit 3550 that is mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear left decorative unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back back left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back back left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear rotation decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510a protruding in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear (see FIG. 182).

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 in which the shaft shaft 3510 a of the back rear left rotational decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back rear left decorative body. The rear back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face is attached to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521 from the back of the back rear left decorative board 3522. The front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the rear cover 3523 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back back left drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 to be attached.

  The back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back back left rotation drive motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and the back rear. A spur gear-like drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the back left rotation decoration body 3510. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3527.

  The back back left decorative body 3521 of the back back left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back left rotated decorative body 3510 are stacked on the front and back. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be positioned between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a part in the front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back left decorative body 3521 and a part extending in a quadrilateral upward from the upper left of the part. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a part extending upward in a square shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed to close the opened rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b projecting in a cylindrical shape forward at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 is inserted so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 can be relatively rotated. Further, the operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotational drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotational decorative body 3510 is moved back and forth via the rotational gear 3527 engaged with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the direction axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a support plate 3551 a that rotatably supports the back back left decorative body unit 3520 and a flat reinforcing plate 3551 that extends vertically. The unit base 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and which is attached to the back box 3010 and extends vertically, the unit cover 3553 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and the upper portion of the front surface of the unit cover 3553 The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 attached so that the shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and the spur gear-like motor gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 3555.

  The back left drive unit 3550 meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a meshed with the transmission gear 3556. A lifting cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a; The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the left and right first slits 3558a, and the operation pins 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b to be slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for biasing the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A rear back left relay board 3561 attached to the front face of 3553, a back rear left lift detection sensor 3562 attached to the rear face of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557; It has.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has a length substantially the same as that of the unit base 3552 and extends up and down, and is formed in a shallow container shape opened to the rear.

  The lift cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558 a of the link member 3558 through the drive pin 3557 b passing through the slit 3560 a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear back left raising / lowering detection sensor 3562 that protrudes rearward through the unit cover 3553. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and a first slit 3558a is provided near the upper end, and a second slit 3558b is provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back back left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back back left decorative board 3522, the back back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left lift drive motor 3554, the back back left lift detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. Is to do.

  Next, the operation of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a), the back rear left rendering unit 3500 has a back back left decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side (front end side) in a normal state. The unit 3520 is in the retracted position where it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (the back back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

  Further, in the normal state assembled in the game board 5, most of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700, and the back rear left lifting drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). Note that the part facing the front of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is in a state where the front is covered by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left / right elevating detection sensor 3562. In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, The link member 3558 is positioned near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is biased upward by the spring 3559, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotated decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Accordingly, when the link member 3558 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear left and right lifting drive motor 3554, the lifting cam gear 3557 is rotated counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is revolved in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inside of the first slit 3558a is slid rightward while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 is moved upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the back left decorative unit 3520 is It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward force of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is reduced.

  Thus, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, so that the back back left rotational decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. However, the back left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right from the back front left production unit 3700 and is visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear back left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position just above the revolution center (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped from rotating counterclockwise, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c)). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force is exerted to rotate the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 clockwise about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 is going to move downward via the operation pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

  When the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the drive pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. Due to the force acting from one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b, the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Accordingly, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotational decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side is front (player side). It becomes visible from.

  In this back back left decorative body unit 3520, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated via the rotation gear 3527 engaged with the drive gear 3526 by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back back left rotation drive motor 3525. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 183). Accordingly, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side) and the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 causes the motor gear 3555 to be reversed. , The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557. As the link member 3558 is moved downward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back back left lift drive motor 3554. The position can be restored.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the back back left decorative unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back back left decorative board 3522 behind the back back left rotated decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back back left decorative board 3522, the back back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521 can be light-decorated. At this time, the LED on the back back left decorative board 3522 emits light in a state where the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The back back left decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right behind production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back back right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back back right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back right decoration body unit of the back rear right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decoration body unit of the back back right performance unit from the rear. FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back back right decorative body unit in the back back right effect unit.

  The back rear right production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the right side of the back rear production unit 3100 near the right end in the back box 3010. The back rear right rendering unit 3600 has a translucent back back right rotating decorative body 3610 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back back right rotating decorative body 3610 that rotatably supports the lower end side. A rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 which is mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back back right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear (see FIG. 188).

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back back right decorative body 3621 in which the shaft shaft 3610a of the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back back right decorative body. The rear back right decoration board 3622 is provided behind the rear part 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. The rear rear right decoration board 3622 is attached to the rear side of the back rear right decoration body 3621 from the rear side. The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decorative body 3610 and the rear cover 3623 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back back right drive unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 to be attached.

  Also, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back back right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and the back rear. A spur gear-like drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decorative body 3610. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627.

  The back back right decorative body 3621 of the back back right decorative body unit 3620 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 are stacked on the front and back. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be positioned between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear right decorative board 3622 are full-color LEDs.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a part in the front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a part extending in a square from the upper right to the upper part of the part. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a part extending upward in a square shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting in a cylindrical shape forward at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. In the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624, the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the back rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. The operation pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved back and forth via the rotation gear 3627 engaged with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the direction axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a flat plate-like reinforcing plate 3651 that has a support shaft 3651 a that rotatably supports the back back right decorative body unit 3620 and extends vertically. A vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front face of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 having an upper part attached to the front face of the unit base 3652; and a unit cover The rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is mounted on the upper surface of the 3653 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotary shaft. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  The back right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting in a columnar shape from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lifting cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit It has a second slit 3658b that extends to the left and right below 3658a and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. Link part that is slidable vertically It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for biasing the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the lift cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of 3653, a back rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 attached to the rear face of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is provided below the unit base 3652 and attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651, and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the back right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is positioned near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape opened to the rear.

  The lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658 a of the link member 3658 through the drive pin 3657 b passing through the slit 3660 a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear back right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and a first slit 3658a is provided near the upper end, and a second slit 3658b is provided at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection of the back back right decorative board 3622, the back back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back back right up / down drive motor 3654, the back back right up / down detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. Is to do.

  Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a), the back back right effect unit 3600 is provided with a back back right decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (front end side) in a normal state. The unit 3620 is in the retracted position where it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (the back back right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right rendering unit 3800 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

  Further, in the normal state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is front (player side). Is not visible.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the raising / lowering cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right / left raising / lowering detection sensor 3662. In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is positioned near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is biased upward by the spring 3659, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3657 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 (back rear right rotation decoration body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Accordingly, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back right-side lift drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated clockwise via the gear portion 3657a, and the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When this drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inside of the first slit 3658a slides to the left while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is retracted. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward force of the link member 3658 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  Thus, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back back right rotational decoration body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back right rotation decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and will be visible from the front (player side).

  In the back rear right rendering unit 3600 of this embodiment, the back and right right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. When the drive pin 3657b moves to a position just above the center of revolution (180 degrees of revolution from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back right up / down drive motor 3654 stops and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 in the clockwise direction is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  In a state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force is exerted by the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 3651a. The link member 3658 is going to move downward through the operation pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back back right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

  In the state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b contacts the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. Accordingly, when the back right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. The elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotational decoration body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

  In this back rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotational drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotational decorative body 3610 is connected via the rotation gear 3627 engaged with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Accordingly, when the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side) and the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back back right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back back right rotation decoration body 3610 is displayed. It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 causes the motor gear 3655 to be reversed. , The link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657. As the link member 3658 moves downward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 It will rotate in the direction of the retreat position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. The position can be restored.

  Since the back back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with a back back right decoration board 3622 behind the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back back right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back back right decorative board 3622, the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back back right decorative body 3621 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED on the back back right decorative board 3622 is caused to emit light by rotating the back back right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The back back right decorative body 3610 and the back back right decorative body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Left front production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit as seen from behind. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one front front left decorative unit in the front front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one front front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit.

  The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left rendering unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in order from the top. The body unit 3710 is used.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is inclined diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. The first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different in shape of the rear cover 3715 from the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in the vertical direction, and are supported so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730.

  Further, the front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and includes a flat plate-shaped front front left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713 having translucency. A back front left decorative board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and a front back 3711 attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front surface of the 3500.

  Further, the front left decorative unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a front front. A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable about a left-right axis. A link member 3719 that rotates, and an open / close slider 3720 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730 are provided.

  The front cover 3711 of the front left decorative unit 3710 has an outer shape that is a shape in which the “convex” character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. The shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the open / close slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality (eight in this case) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 has a flat shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left side after protruding from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. And a crankshaft 3734 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can be rotated about a shaft in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 3733 because the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712 a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720 a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  The back left decorative body 3713 is provided with a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo, or the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, although illustration is omitted. The front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the front left decorative substrate 3714 are full-color LEDs.

  The support plate 3716 extends in the vertical direction with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716 bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. Yes. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the right. This support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger advances and retreats downward. The front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3719 can be rotated about the left and right axis about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted therebetween, and a second connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3720 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of the shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 with its plate surface facing forward. The shutter 3732 is in a closed state in which the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed. In this normal state, the front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Has been.

  In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is positioned at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719, the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b moves downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is in a state of being directed upward and downward, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3730. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

  Thereafter, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has been moved upward is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and the movement opposite to the above is performed. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the back front left decorative body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of the player, and to entertain the player with a change in the decoration.

  Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are caused to emit light. Thus, the light-decorated shutter unit 3730 can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, so that the light-decorated back-front left The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, the back front left rendering unit 3700 has three back front left decorative body units: a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light emission, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three front left decorative body units 3710. Can show.

[5-9k. Right front production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one front front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is one exploded front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the front right effect unit, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the front right effect unit.

  The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back right effect unit 3600 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right rendering unit 3800 has three back front right decorations of a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C in order from the top. The body unit 3810 is used.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is inclined obliquely so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different in shape of the rear cover 3815 from those of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating front and rear, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in the vertical direction, and are supported so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830.

  Further, the front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and includes a flat plate-shaped front front right decorative body 3813 having translucency and a back front right decorative body 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front and a front back 3811 attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front surface of 3600.

  Further, the front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a front front. A transmission member 3818 attached to the distal end of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable about a left and right axis. A link member 3819 that rotates, and an open / close slider 3820 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

  The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape that has a “convex” character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830. The shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the open / close slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 is configured by a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a column shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3832, and a right side after protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. And a crankshaft 3834 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 3833 as the shaft portion 3833 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812 a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820 a of the open / close slider 3820.

  Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3813 is provided with a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo, or the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the front right decorative board 3814 are full-color LEDs.

  The support plate 3816 extends in the vertical direction with the plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. Yes. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the left. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger advances and retreats downward. The front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3819 can be rotated about the left and right axis about the support pin 3816a by inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted therebetween, and a second connection connected to the open / close slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of the shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 with its plate surface facing forward. The shutter 3832 closes the frame of the front cover 3811. In this normal state, the front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been.

  In a normal state, the front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is positioned at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. Thus, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819, the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b moves downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3835 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3835 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces in the up-and-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the rear front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

  After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that was moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the front right rendering unit 3800 of this embodiment, the front front right decorative body 3813 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the front right driving solenoid 3817. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of the player, and to entertain the player with a change in the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in a closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are caused to emit light. Thus, the player can show the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the right front decorative substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, so The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Further, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has three back front right decorative body units: a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3830 and can be decorated with light emission, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three front right decorative body units 3810. Can show.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown with the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower back middle rotary decorative body of the lower back middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows the back rear rotating decorative body of the back rear rendering unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back rear right. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board showing the back right rotation decorative body of the effect unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 203 shows the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the gaming board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

  FIG. 205 shows the back and rear movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear upper and rear rotating decorative body of the rear back effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back of the back rear left effect unit. The left rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the descent position to the up position, respectively.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side In the normal state, the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent. 111, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 are rotated to the left and back in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the gaming panel 1100, as shown in FIG. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit Rotation decoration body 3310 under the back of the base 3300, front rotation decoration body 3410 and back front decoration body 3421 of the back top production unit 3400, front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of the back front left production unit 3700, front back The front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the right effect unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 to the right rail 1005. Along the side right middle unit 2700. Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back upper effect unit 3400 and is not visible from the player side.

  The back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the center of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 at the center and the left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is positioned behind the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. This lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 is a perspective from the upper side of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the numerical ornament above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

  Further, the front upper decoration body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends to the left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and center accessory. While being visible through 2500, the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back top front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back up / down decoration unit 3450 having the back back rotation decoration 3440 of the back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back front decoration 3421 in a normal state. Visible from the side.

  Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back back left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back back left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position that is behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is not visible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 having the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 of the back back right rendering unit 3600 is in a retracted position at the rear of the back front right rendering unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is not visible from the player side.

  In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back left decorative body units 3710, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A on the upper side is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third front left decorative unit 3710C on the lower side is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

  In the normal state, the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a shutter unit 3730 in a closed state in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back right decorative body units 3810, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The middle second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the lower third back front right decorative body unit 3810C have a gaming panel 1100 and a center that are transparent from the left side to the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter unit 3830 closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The game board 5 provides a rear effect of the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 The front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3126, so that the lock member 3134 is moved. Then, the back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. Thereby, the large back and rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player an effect (movable effect) that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  In the back rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3126, and the back back movable decorative body is displayed. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / backward drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed in the normal rotation / reverse rotation so that the back movable movable body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. Accordingly, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back and back movable decorative body 3110 and the back The movable decorative body 3110 can be noted, and the movement of the back movable movable body 3110 can be enjoyed.

  As an effect using the back lower middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is rotated by rotating the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotated with a round, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

  Since the under-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the player feels that the roulette is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Susoku”, and the numbers of the number decoration of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 stopped. Depending on, "piece" may be advanced. As a result, depending on whether or not the rotating back / bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the “piece” proceeds to the desired “升”, It can be thrilled and entertained by the player. In addition, as the “piece” advances for the player, the player can feel as if the expected value is increasing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  For example, FIG. 202 shows an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250, the back top effect unit 3400, the back back left effect unit 3500, and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As shown, the back bottom left rotation motor 3205 rotates the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 in the back bottom left rendering unit 3200, and the back bottom right rotation motor 3255 rotates the back bottom right rotation decoration in the back bottom right rendering unit 3250. 3251 is rotated. Further, in the back effect unit 3400, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back front rotation drive motor 3425 and the back lift elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved downward from the retracted position by the back lift drive motor 3429. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is rotated by the rear upper rear rotation driving motor 3454. Further, in the back back left rendering unit 3500, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back back left lifting drive motor 3554, and back back by the back back left rotation drive motor 3525. The left rotation decorative body 3510 is rotated. Further, in the back back right effect unit 3600, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left by the back back right up / down drive motor 3654, and back back by the back back right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated.

  As a result, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 can be moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, By rotating the six decorative bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and raise the sense of expectation for the game by thinking that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back up / down raising / lowering drive motor 3429, the back rear left / right up / down driving motor 3554, and the back back / right up / down driving motor 3654 are repeatedly forward / reversed as appropriate, so that the back / up / down decoration body unit 3450 / back / left back decoration The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. The player can be entertained.

  Moreover, you may make it rotate the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 in this case. As a result, since the seven decorative bodies rotate in a rounded manner, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. The expectation for a game can be raised.

  As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the back and back left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated by the back and back left rotation drive motor 3525. Further, in the back back right production unit 3600, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second upper left appearance position by the back back right raising / lowering drive motor 3654 and back back right rotation drive motor 3625 is used. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the player's eyes seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at the approximate height, so there is something that can surprise the player and do something good. It can be thought that it is, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back rear left rotated decorative body 3510 and the back rear right rotated decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. Thereby, it is possible to show the player the effect that the eyes of the character are turning around, and to entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is moved by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right rendering unit 3800. Accordingly, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 are visible from the player side, so the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  The production using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 includes three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810, respectively. The shutter unit 3730 of the front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Thus, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Rear back production unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorative bodies and the like may be moved. This
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to be sure that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” gaming state) occurs for the player, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back back right effect unit 3600, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 and the back back right decorative body unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back movable ornament 3110 is avoided.

  In addition, although the movement of each decoration body was demonstrated above, when moving each decoration body, the light emission effect of a decoration body was made to a player by light-emitting the LED of the decoration board provided in the back suitably. Can be shown, and can attract the player's interest even more.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be combined as appropriate, and also combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various combinations of lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and various effects. It is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game panel 1100 provided with a game area 5a on the front side and has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 5100. The front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is partitioned into a non-distributable region that is impossible and formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening portion 1112 in the state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow region and the inner side becomes the non-flow region. A flat support portion 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inner side). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided. Since nothing is extended to the flow area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thus, the substantial distribution area can be up to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which is substantially more than that of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by increasing the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided as the effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable body of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the like can be made easier to see. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the production and the production.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inner side) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall is provided by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (contacts) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B comes into contact. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and playing the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. Can be prevented and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be hardly seen, and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind through the accessory 2500) and the movable body or decorative body of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, It is possible to increase the range in which the effect image, movable body, decorative body, etc. that are provided behind can be seen, and to make the effect of the effect produced by the effect device easier, and to be provided behind the non-distribution area The pachinko machine 1 can be displayed by the large viewing range of the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in the pachinko machine 1 by the light of illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, due to the transparent part. Since light from the light emitting means (LED, production display device 1600, etc.) can be reflected, refracted, diffused, or transmitted, transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 You can show it gorgeously, improve its appearance, and increase your appeal to players. At this time, a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Further, since the center object 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left rendering unit 3700 or the back rear left rendering unit 3500) provided behind the support portion 2503. By the light emission by the light emitting means (LED), the above effects can be obtained, and the player can recognize the presence of the movable body by the transparent support portion 2503.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is attached to the game panel. The lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended with the same thickness as 1100, and the support part 2503 has a rear back left decorative body 3030 and an effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect due to the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion (design) behind the support portion 2503 in the front left decorative body 3030, the effect image of the stage device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the front left decorative body 3030 and the effect image can be more easily seen.

  Further, since at least a part of the front end side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the front end side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since the tip side of the surface can show a line different from the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design compared to the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems to be concerned with details. The pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

  Further, since at least a part of the front end side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the extension amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the corresponding portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is possible to make an illusion as if it is difficult to notice the presence of the support portion 2503.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, Compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended from the end side, since the reduction in the reinforcing effect by the support part 2503 with respect to the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reduced, the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact.

  Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 has a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening portion 1112, the opening portion 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be concealed or decorated by the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can be made difficult to see.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is in a state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening part 1112, can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall part 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good-looking pachinko in the game area 5 a A machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100, the peripheral wall 2501 in the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 is partitioned regardless of whether the gaming panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distributed area to be played, the movable body and decoration of the effect unit, etc. can be seen well from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 The pachinko machine 1 which can fully exhibit the production effect by etc. can be provided.

  Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can easily recognize the circulation region and the non-circulation region partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the flow area side (outside) is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 does not extend, and at a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Is not provided with a support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support portion 2503 obstructs the visibility of the effect device (the effect display device 1600 and the effect unit of the back unit 3000). In addition, the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device can be provided to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502. Therefore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally molded with resin. When removing from the mold, deformation of the molded product can be prevented.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from other portions. An increase in the difference in shrinkage amount can be avoided, and deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the flat game panel 1100 that closes the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. The back rear left up / down drive motor 3554 and the back back right up / down drive of the back back right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back back left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 are made transparent. The motor 3654 is disposed so that at least a part of the motor 3654 is out of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. A game is played from inside the game area 5a so as to cover at least a part of the game area 5a in the up / down drive motor 3554 and the back right up / down drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending to the outside of the area 5a are provided, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided. It is possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right up / down drive motor 3654, and through the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a from the player side, the rear back left up / down drive motor 3554 and the back rear The right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated. The front left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 can be seen, so that the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  In addition, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a defined by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not defined. The game area 5a can be shown larger even if the game area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, since the game area 5a appears larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to increase the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and to play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can increase appeal to the player.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a part in the game area 5a in front of functional parts such as the back back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back back right lift drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same operational effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional component difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a can be made difficult to understand by the continuous decoration, and the game is given with a feeling of opening. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. You can make it stand out and increase your appeal to the player.

  Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are opaque, the back back left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the player can see the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional components is arranged outside the game area 5a in front view (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). Since the rear rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right raising / lowering driving motor 3654 are arranged completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a, the front structural member 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. It can suppress that the space of the game area | region 5a becomes small by taking a balance. In other words, a part of the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is disposed in the game area 5a in a front view, so that the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. Thus, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of further exerting the above-described effects can be obtained. In addition, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. You may make it arrange | position all the drive sources (a motor, a solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable within the game area | region 5a out of the game area | region 5a.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, an effect display device 1600, etc. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused, and it can be seen as if the front component member 1000 or the game panel 1100 is emitting light. Can improve the appearance. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with an opaque decorative seal 3032 and a decorative seal 3042, but the respective bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided. Since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be seen from the back left decorative body 3030 or the back It can reach the front right decorative body 3040 and give an impression that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

  Further, since at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is covered with the back front left decorative body 3030, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering all. It becomes painful and can look like a part of the decoration. Accordingly, since the back front left decorative body 3030 does not have a size that covers the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. The game area 5a can be shown larger while reducing the cost of 3030. It should be noted that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and conceal at least a part of the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back back right elevating drive motor 3654. It is desirable to make the portion closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined portion where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as a lower left position in FIG. 131, that is, a lower left corner position on the game board 5) extends from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be shown larger.

  Further, the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the back by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same function and effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back front left decorative body is formed in the door window 101a. The rear back left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 and the like behind the 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, the back left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inner part of the door window 101a in the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional part is hidden. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-like door frame 3, so that the front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long. The cost concerning the back left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front face is inclined toward the game panel 1100 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 at the two general winning openings 2001. In contrast, in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the front wall 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the front face of the first start opening 2002 is directed forward (player side), the first start opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Accordingly, since the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first start opening 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B received in the first start opening 2002 is reduced (or the first start opening). The player's consciousness concentrates on the general prize opening 2001 rather than the mouth 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 Can be expected to increase the sense of expectation of the game, and can prevent the player from recognizing the interest, and can surely recognize the position of the first start port 2002 that the player should aim for. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first start port 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the winning (for example, “big hit”) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, and the expectation for the game is increased. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern is generated, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is received in the general winning port 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed. The player is not discouraged, and the game can be continued to be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first start port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a sticker is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a seal is attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give the player a sense of incongruity and can prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, making the player enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, the player can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of receiving the game. This can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. Since the light from the means (LED of the decorative board) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be shown gorgeously, and the appearance is good. As a result, the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and the received game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening in the first starting opening 2002. Since the game ball B is guided later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superior feeling) due to the reception of the game ball B at the first start opening 2002 is received as a general prize. The player can be allowed to taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front face of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the gaming panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since the game ball 1 can be discharged faster than the game ball B received at the first start port 2002, it is unnecessary for the game ball B to be received at the general winning port 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, and the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, and the game can be progressed crisply and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, the majority of the gaming ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B was received in the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if a privilege (the lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to avoid having distrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, It is possible to continue to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning prize can be reduced. Decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Accordingly, since the cost for the general winning a prize opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 that can be more enjoyed by the player can be obtained by turning that amount to a production device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the back bottom middle rotation that has a plurality of (in this case, six) stop positions at even locations. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length corresponding to half of the stop positions, and a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and a region detection piece 3325. A plurality (here, four) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting the position detection and a single position identification sensor 3331 detecting the position detection piece 3326 Therefore, when the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 are rotated in the rotation direction. It will repeatedly decrease after increasing in order from the side, and the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the three stop positions in which the region detection piece 3325 becomes half The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is three-half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detecting piece 3325 at the position of the decorative numeral “3”. When the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Furthermore, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected by the area detecting piece 3325. Is not detected. Thereafter, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. Thus, the detection / non-detection of the region specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

  As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the number of stop positions is provided, a combination of detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be used to rotate the back and middle. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected and all the region specifying sensors 3330 are not detected until the middle back decorative rotating body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, The current position of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  And since the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the region detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of region specifying sensors 3330 are provided. The detection of the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331 can be detected accurately after the detection of the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the shift of the stop position as much as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be performed by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable (uncomfortable feeling), to enjoy the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decoration body 3310 in the lower back, and to suppress the decrease in interest, The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (backside middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give the player unpleasant feeling.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotational speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the fast rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front player side, and after the crotch rotation, it is optional. Since the player can show a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, a stop position that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (a grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 in the back bottom middle stage production unit 3300 is shown as having six stop positions, but is not limited thereto. It is good also as what has four to ten stop positions.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (rear bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As such, “circulate”, “linearly move”, “circularly move”, “curve move”, and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a second. The second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning port sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and the first big winning port 2005. A first grand prize port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B, a second big prize port sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second grand prize port 2006, and a game ball B received in the out port 2010 are detected. Out-out sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port The detection signals from the second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in 012 and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are the main control I / O. Input through port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., or a status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, a normal symbol display, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display A drive signal is output to a display device, a second special symbol display device, a second special reserved number display device, a round display device, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big prize port sensor 2402, the second big prize port sensor 2601, and the out port sensor 3053 are non- Whereas the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 include a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened, and the game balls B frequently enter. The detection of the game ball B by the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second big prize opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second big prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, the out port sensor 3053 uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, since the game balls B do not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-cut detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit and is input to the payout control MPU through the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Insert error" (specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (seconds per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the gaming board 5 side are transmitted by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  The display control MPU has a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is in progress. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to an image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. “Sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction crossing the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.115, FIG.130 etc. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game ball 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N, so that the game ball The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central release portion 2513a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, so the first is likely to occur. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (short time)” A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates “winning” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2511, the game ball B is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 or the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. May be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guidance of the center accessory 2500 A plurality of the first guide passages 2521 and the second guide passages 2522 of the passage group 2520 that are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance that is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. Accordingly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that comes into contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not come into contact with the stop 1006 (right hit). When the game ball B is hit with a somewhat weaker strength), the second guide passage 2522 is entered with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been shot into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 in accordance with the hit strength.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is distributed than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 is circulated.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. When the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit The closed second start port 2004 in 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal variation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. The left side of the right side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received in the general winning opening 2001, and in rare cases it is received in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a without the opportunity to be received in the second grand prize port 2006, the second start port 2004, and the first grand prize port 2005. .

  In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate part 2003 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning port 2001, second big winning port 2006, second of the side right middle unit 2700 are received. There is no opportunity to be accepted at the start opening 2004 or the first grand prize winning opening 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  Thus, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received in the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B can be urged to be driven toward the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than “right-handed” in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006, it is possible to prompt a drive operation that requires fine adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182. The main game of pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B that has passed through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Is passed through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  At this time, if the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second big prize opening 2006 when the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten pieces, or from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633). , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big prize opening 2006 is left on the first shelf 2412a, the second start door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412c, the first grand prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d are rolled leftward into the game area 5a. Released.

  When the game ball B rolls on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second start door When 2414 moves backward, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (short time)” A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “win” is performed.

  In addition, when the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2417, a special lottery result (the first lottery) drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”), the first big prize opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Thus, the game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the first big prize opening 2005 when the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten pieces, or the like) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first grand prize opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of game balls B can be paid out. Can entertain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) In addition, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is drawn by lottery. The special lottery results include “losing”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “per hour (shorter)”, “ "Short-term accuracy change", "No short-term accuracy change" Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the turn is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an open / close pattern for making the game balls B unacceptable (one open / close pattern is 1). (Referred to as round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first big winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・ Time is generated. This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In the present embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the lighted LEDs.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which each image sequence is changed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of images are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the image sequences are displayed in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, “small hit” game, “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotation operation unit 302, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button lift drive motor. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back Lower left effect unit 3200, back lower right effect unit 3250, back lower effect unit 3300, back upper effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and front back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, and the like by using the right effect unit 3800 as appropriate, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation to be operated by the player is wrong or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting auxiliary member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the bottom surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the island board 8 in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When installing (attaching) to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is assisted to prevent it from falling over. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foam resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3, although detailed illustration is omitted. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Thereby, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted part of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting part of the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

  The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, It is possible to use, for example, “by locking”, “by magnetic attachment by magnet”, “by hook-and-loop fastener”, “by suction plate”, “by peelable adhesive”, and the like. Further, the position of the mounting unit in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, and the like. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. Used by attaching to the unit 200. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the tray unit 200 in advance when shipping the pachinko machine 1 from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 has the dish unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that protrude greatly forward, and thus forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion on the lower side of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, so that the space between the dish unit 200 and the island board 8 is set. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at the position, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping over. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and troublesome.

  In addition, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from toppling over, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the overturning can be avoided, and a game hall or manufacturer It is a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

  Furthermore, since the mounting part for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting part of the tray unit 200 to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the device from falling forward, so that it is possible to make the production device or the decorative member provided on the door frame 3 larger or to protrude further forward. A pachinko machine having a greatly different appearance from that of the machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are greatly protruded forward in the door frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power.

  In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The tray unit 200 of the frame 3 may be detachable by sliding in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 is provided detachably on the door frame 3). , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility or removing it from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the functional members (for example, “substrate cover that covers the substrate”, “wiring” provided to the main body frame 4 in a removable manner). Wiring holding member for holding ”,“ Protective cover for protecting the rear of the effect display device and movable decorative body ”,“ Storage tank for storing game media ”,“ Guiding member for distributing game media ”, etc.) You may make it also use. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), so that the pachinko machine 1 is stable. Be able to stand on their own. On the other hand, in a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, a function of constituting a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined part of the main body frame 4. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from being detached due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player unpleasant feeling can be obtained.

  Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required and to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, you may make it provide the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that accommodation in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is possible. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility and make it independent, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming worse or the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Therefore, the installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 as compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed and stored separately, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  In addition, in said embodiment, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 which had the to-be-mounted part attached to the mounting part of the plate unit 200 was shown, it is not limited to this and it is not having a to-be-mounted part Also good.

  Moreover, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When installing in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be protruded downward and brought into contact with the roof plate 8. Thereby, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, so that it is possible to reduce the labor involved in managing the game hall.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 208 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first performs various processes as the process of step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Data stored in a register or a RAM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as a main control built-in RAM) is initialized. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Whether or not to reach as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used in the lottery process for a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game Reach random number to be used for lottery processing (whether or not to produce an effect), design random number to be used for lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number Random numbers such as (the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number), the random number used for the lottery process (normal random number) for the winning of the opening of the second starting port 2004, etc. And it includes a random number counter that.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even if it is configured, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach ratio of the reach effect is obtained by acquiring from the counter that has a different range of random numbers for updating the reach random number. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different from the first reach determination table as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. In addition, after the process of step S1 and S2 is performed in this way, only the process of said step S2 is fundamentally repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 208 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, as a process of step S12, a first count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the gate sensor 2801, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the first big winning port 2005, Detection signals from various sensors such as a second count sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the second grand prize winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and various magnetic sensors are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  After the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process related to winning when the second start port 2004 is opened as the process of step S15. Note that even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, When a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051 or the like is in an on state, a winning ball process for outputting a payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that a winning ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3052 is turned on, “3 balls”, the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 is turned on. When the second start sensor 2401 is turned on, “1 ball”, when the game ball B wins the first big prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor is turned on, “15 balls”, the second big prize opening. When the game ball B wins in 2006 and the second count sensor is turned on, “15 balls”, when the game ball B wins the general prize opening 2001 and the general winning port sensor 3051 is turned on. Each “8 ball” prize ball is paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 209, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is on (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and is stored in the main control. A first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game is being controlled is set (step S35). The big hit control process (step S40) which performs is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the big hit type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests “15R big hit” The first count sensor detects that ten game balls B have been won after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or at the first big prize opening 2005. The process which controls to the 15R big hit game which repeats the opening / closing pattern to be closed 15 times when it is done is executed.

  In the big hit control process, the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and then the time-short flag setting process is executed. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control (control executed in the time reduction state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit based on the short time control after the big hit game is ended, which will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown at 220 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set so that the time reduction control is ended when the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once. That is, when the time-shortening control is started after the big hit game ends, and the condition of either executing the variable display of the first special symbol five times or executing the variable display of the second special symbol once is satisfied. The time reduction control is terminated.

  Further, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being controlled is set (step S36). If the running flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests “small hit”, the second big prize opening 2006 to be described later is displayed. Closed after opening the second grand prize opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B or when the second count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the second big prize opening 2006 Execute the process. Further, when the game ball B that has won a prize in the second big prize opening 2006 and is distributed by the sorting member enters the specific area, the game is controlled to the big hit game and the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have been won in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 15 times. To do. On the other hand, when the game balls B won in the first big prize opening 2005 and distributed by the sorting member do not enter the specific area, and enter the discharge area, they are not controlled by the big hit game, After the winning game is over, the game state (normal state or short time state) before the small hit game is controlled again.

  The main control MPU also has a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On the condition that the value of “0” is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step S38). On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the two special symbol reserved storage areas is not “0” (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39).

  FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3052 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, the process shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. To store.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or the type type of game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S42 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S45, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and the number of stored storages (the value of the number of held counters) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first And a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (a value of one special reservation number counter) (step S62).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the execution display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is performed as the game effect to be executed or the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on the counter value, the second reserved memory number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. To store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) indicating the second reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the storage process (step S20) It is supposed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process is described here. In the first special symbol process, on the condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag. It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. Variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for the aspect is performed
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control mode is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol as described above (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 208).

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 is shown. The random numbers extracted according to the generation are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big hit or the small win is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. 216A and a special random number (if the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number read in step S102, When the two special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 216 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the three types of the first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating that the big hit is won, and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched with a big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number is won in a small hit, and 265 types of first special random numbers are matched with a loss determination value indicating that it is the loss. Associated with (probability of big hit; 1/135, probability of small hit; 3/270). In this example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, two types of second special random numbers are included in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. 113 types of second special random numbers that match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won and 155 types of second special random numbers that coincide with the jackpot determination value that indicates that the jackpot determination value is different from the jackpot determination value. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss determination value indicating that the random number is the loss (big hit probability: 1/135, small hit probability: 113/270). In other words, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning to the first starting port 2002 is performed. This is in a state advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the (random number), if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is the short-time state, and when the gaming state is the non-short-time state, the non-time reduction is used. And a reach determination table in a state. In the reach determination table in the short-time state, the reach reaches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicates that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Each random number is associated.

  In addition, the reach determination table in the non-short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the short-time state reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-short-time state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the short-time state.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the reach reach table selected with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 217, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 216 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 216 (B), in the jackpot symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated with each other according to the judgment result (14R hour junior college hit, 5R hour junior college hit). It is remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game that can enter the first big prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game is finished, the special symbol change is 100 If the next big hit game does not occur until the next execution, the state is terminated when the state is terminated.
2. After the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005 (1 round), after the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B are won in the second big prize opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening / closing pattern that is closed four times when detected (4 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R big hit game that can enter the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 (easy). After the jackpot game is over, if the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once, the next jackpot game does not occur Short state when finished B Control to 5R time reduction jackpot A
3. After the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the second big prize opening 2006 By repeating the opening and closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R big hit game that can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy), and after the big hit game is finished, the special symbol changes 100 If the next jackpot game does not occur until the next game is executed, the state is terminated when the state is terminated.
4). After the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the first big prize opening 2005 (1 round), after the second grand prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 10 game balls B are won in the second big prize opening 2006 by the second count sensor. By repeating the opening / closing pattern that is closed four times when detected (4 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R big hit game that can enter the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 (easy). After the jackpot game is over, if the first special symbol variation display is executed five times or the second special symbol variation display is executed once, the next jackpot game does not occur Short state when finished B Control to 5R time reduction jackpot B

  In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are assigned when the short hit is A at 14R, and 94 judgment values are assigned when the short hit is A at 5R. Yes. In other words, if a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a short hit is A at 14R with a probability of 6% and a short hit with A at 5R is with a probability of 94%. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the shortage big hit B at 14R, and 42 decision values are sorted when the shortage big hit B at 5R. ing. In other words, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, it becomes a short hit B for 14R at a probability of 58%, and a short hit B for 5R at a probability of 42%. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined to be a short jackpot at 14R is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002. It is in a state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when a lottery result for the big hit is obtained, the gaming state after the big hit game is ended is determined according to the type of the big hit. In the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game is controlled, a process for setting the time reduction flag based on the determination result and a process for setting the time reduction number according to the type of the big hit in the time reduction counter. Executed.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the big hits of “14R hourly jackpot A” and “14R hourly jackpot B” have been obtained, after 14 rounds of jackpot game have been executed, a special symbol (first special symbol) When it is determined that the jackpot of “5R short-time big hit A” and “5R short-time big hit B” has been obtained until the symbol fluctuation of the sum of the second special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times. After five rounds of big hit game is executed, the time is controlled until the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times, or until the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when the lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a big win, the lottery result is controlled to be in a short time state after the big bonus game is finished, and similarly the lottery result based on the lottery based on the second special random number Even if the game is obtained, the time is always controlled after the big hit game is over. However, when the big hits of “14R hourly big hit A” and “14R hourly big hit B” are obtained, the big hit game is more than the case where the big hit of “5R hourly big hit A” and “5R hourly big hit B” is obtained. After execution, it is controlled to be in a short time state over a long period of time.

  Also, if the 14R hourly jackpot A is determined, the 14R hourly jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the 14R hourly jackpot symbol A, and if the 5R hourly jackpot A is determined, the 5R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is 5R. Decide on A symbol for time and college. In addition, if the second special symbol stop symbol setting process is determined to be 14R hour short hit per B, the 14R big hit symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be 14R hour short hit per B symbol, and if 5R hour short hit per B is determined. The 2R special symbol 5R big hit symbol is determined to be the 5R short junior big symbol B symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs either of the lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach lose, or lose) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may be an instruction for a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, the process is terminated.

  The peripheral control MPU performs display control of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is variably displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage of decorative symbol variation, when a big hit is identified from the received determination result notification command, the big bonus symbol (left, middle, right decorative symbol is [0] to [8] (combination of the same symbols) and when reach lose is specified, the lose symbol with reach (the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols [0] to [8]) If the combination is a combination of symbols with a different middle decorative pattern; reach lose pattern, and if a loss is specified, it is at least the left / right of the left / middle / right decorative patterns. Display pattern of the determined stop symbol when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends).

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 218, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the jackpot flag set. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal loss (reach effect) If it is a losing), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing (not shown) Is selected (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 performs the variation display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. Production control is performed at.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with a low expectation degree of jackpot Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and for players who want to generate a big hit game, the player's expectation for the big hit game will increase when the super reach production is executed. It has become.

  In the variation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds is set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-short-time state, and 4 to 60 seconds is set in the short-time state. As the corresponding variation time, 13 to 60 seconds are set in the non-short-time state, and 2 to 60 seconds are set in the time-short state.

  When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined as a process of step S151 whether or not the counter value of the short time counter where the number of times of the short time state is set is “0”. If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S152), and it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, a time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction control is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not “0”, Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 219, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 220, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process of the above, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 has the second control. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of one special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185) when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183). As a result, the time-shortening control is terminated when a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, 5 times) of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed. The control of the non-short-time state is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start (time for displaying that the big hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, processing for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit number counter is decremented by one for each round execution in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the prescribed round number. And control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches “0”, the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the big prize opening open process (step S92) are repeatedly executed to win the big prize. When the round is ended in the open mouth process (step S92), the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the big open mouth opening post process (step S93) and the big hit game is ended. The control to be executed is executed.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (14R short hit big hit A start command, 5R short hit big hit A start command) corresponding to the big hit type (A short hit big hit at 14R, 5A short hit big hit at 5R) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit game according to the type of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a big hit start command (14R short / big hit B start command, 5R short / big hit per B start) according to the type of big hit (14R hour short hit B, 5R short hit big hit B) Command).

  Further, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed, when the big hit game is ended, specifically, in the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93) of the big hit control processing (step S40). Opening / closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or ten game balls B are won in the first big prize opening 2005. Is detected when the first count sensor detects that the open / close pattern is closed 14 times or 5 times) (when all rounds that can be executed in the big hit game). When the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process (step S14), while in the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S191), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying that the small hit game is started) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S191, a small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A, 5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A) A start command) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. In the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process, a small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B). Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command).

  Further, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is finished, specifically, the small hit control process (step S41) described later (step S401). ), The opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the type of the small hit (for example, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened (for example, 1.8 seconds) or the game ball B is 10 in the first big prize opening 2005 It is reset when the opening / closing control to close when it is detected by the first count sensor that the individual winning is completed. When the small hitting execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the device and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the interval time is set in the interval timer until the next special symbol change display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed). (Step S194), the process proceeds to Step S195.

  When the processing of step S186 to step S194 is executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value. (Step S195), the process is terminated.

    FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the big hit game based on the fact that the display mode when the variable display is stopped is the big hit symbol. Waiting until the next round is started, or waiting until the next round starts (step S91)
2. Based on the fact that the special symbol variation display stop mode has become a big hit symbol, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to be opened, or the next round is started. The first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are controlled to be opened, and the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the first Processing for opening the big prize opening to be closed when the first count sensor or the second count sensor detects that ten game balls B have won the big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (step S92).
3. The big winning opening opening post-process that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game is over when all rounds are over (step S93).

  The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208). Further, in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S92), a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued at the start of the round for controlling the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 to the open state. At the end of the round for controlling the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 to the closed state, a big hit round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a jackpot game effect according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by a device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start process for executing a setting process for starting a small hit game (step S400)
2. Small hit-medium processing for monitoring the entry and release time of the game ball B during the small hit game (step S401)

  The small hitting process flag is operated to indicate that the small hitting start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small hit processing, the big hit execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game corresponding to the type of the small hit (5R small) If the win is 4 rounds and 14R is a small hit, 13 rounds) are set in the big hit number counter, and the process is terminated. Thereby, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

  FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate-passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM. Execute.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 displays the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per game”, a process for controlling the game ball B to be received at the second starting port 2004 is performed. Normal electric accessory release process to be executed (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 208).

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. . Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of stored normal symbol symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control into the held state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (not acquiring the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter), the normal symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, as a gate part passage process (step S802), you may make it like another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is now on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 firstly The ordinary random number and the usual variable random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the holding number of normal symbols is “4” which is the maximum value. Do. When it is determined that the number of stored normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal number of counters is incremented (add 1) so that the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols is newly held. Next, the previously obtained ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number (the ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Are stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter. On the other hand, as a result of obtaining the counter value by the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is “4” which is the maximum value (the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the obtained ordinary symbol fluctuation display control is newly performed. It is good also as preventing it from being suspended.

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 225, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbol variable display stored in each storage area of the main control MPU RAM is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the variable display control hold can be canceled in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 226A with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The common figure determination table shown in FIG. 226 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the per-standard-judgment determination table that is referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, the above-mentioned normal random numbers are set so that all ten types of normal random numbers are consistent with the per-standard-judgment determination value indicating that the common-rank is won. Is associated. In other words, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, the winning combination is always won.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing and determines that it is normal symbol (step S829), A universal symbol flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol is set (step S830), and the normal symbol variation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined as the regular symbol symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol losing symbol is determined as the mode (the normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, the lottery result (indicating either one of the usual symbols or the loss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Sets the common figure determination result notification command corresponding to each result. After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) as the process of step S835, this process is terminated.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 227, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the time flag set. If this is the case (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time reduction is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction is selected. (Step S843).

  Then, by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, a variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), A normal symbol variation display command of the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 by setting a general symbol variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation with the determined normal symbol variation pattern. Is started (step S845).

  Further, when the main control MPU determines the usual figure fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the usual figure fluctuation time corresponding to the decided common figure fluctuation pattern in the usual figure fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display (the normal symbol variation display) of the function display unit 1400 for the usual symbol variation time corresponding to the determined ordinary symbol variation pattern.

  Further, in the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-short-time operation of this example, 20 seconds is set as the ordinary symbol variation time. On the other hand, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the short time in this example is 0.8 seconds as the normal symbol variation time so that the normal symbol variation time is shorter than the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-temporal time variation. Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  When the normal symbol variation display control is started, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the processing of step S847, End the process.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 228, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. In step S846, the normal time change timer set with the normal time change time is decremented by one. If it is determined that the normal symbol variation time timer is 0, that is, that the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop process (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 229, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The usual stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

  Then, when the above-mentioned normal winning flag is set (step S863), the second starting port corresponding to the current gaming state is determined using the normal winning time opening pattern table shown in FIG. 226 (B). A release pattern 2004 is set (step S864).

  Specifically, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of opening, the open pattern A is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on a normal drawing is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number. An opening pattern A in which the start port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second start port 2004 opens and closes in a short open mode (in this example, 0.05 seconds) is executed. Thereby, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the time for the second starting port 2004 to open is short, and the game ball is in a state where the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. Is difficult to enter. In other words, even when the second start port 2004 is opened and closed during the non-time-short state, the game ball hardly enters.

  On the other hand, if the opening time of the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a short time state, the open pattern B is set as the open pattern of the second start port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result based on a normal drawing is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number. The opening pattern B in which the start opening solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second start opening 2004 is opened and closed in a long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is executed. As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, it takes a long time for the second starting port 2004 to perform the opening operation, and when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball Can enter the ball.

  When the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 is set, next, as a process of step S885, a start command per game showing that the game per game is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. When the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866), this process ends. Note that the start-per-common-command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the per-normal-game game in accordance with the type of per-normal instructed by the start per-multi-command is displayed on the effect display device 1600, It can be executed by a lamp, LED, speaker, or the like.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value when the universal symbol flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S807).

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control board 1310 has a main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. If the predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the control MPU controlled the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU When the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the start port 2004 is turned off and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the second start port 2004. Is the timing for opening the second start port 2004 (step S874), the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on to control the second start port 2004 to the open state (step S875). End the process.

  If it is not time to open the second start port 2004 in the process of step S871, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second start port 2004 as shown in FIG. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (the number of times of opening of the second start port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), an end command per command is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S878), this processing is ended. Note that the per-game end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end-per-map command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be terminated.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 231, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 232 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fact that the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process and step S149a of the second fluctuation pattern setting process) is received is received. Based on this, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process regarding the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning when the 16 mS has passed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be.

1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of first special symbol, second variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by command analysis process above After performing processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol), the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during variation effect. Change production start process to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time since the start of the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED and the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special design (first In the process of changing effects (step S712), the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the change end process when the change time corresponding to the change pattern of the one special symbol and the second special symbol elapses.
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command for instructing to stop changing the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changing the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, changing to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process if the big hit, changing to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process if the big hit (Step S713)
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and the effect process flag is changed when the jackpot game is ended. Big hit effect processing (step S714) to be changed to a value corresponding to the effect start processing
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game, the effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the small hit game, and the second big prize opening during the small hit game If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is allocated to a specific area, the effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game ends, and the game ball B is allocated to the specific area If not, the small hit effect process to change to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process (step S715)

  Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of function display unit 1400) by the above processing. The decorative display variable display is executed on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of short-time control]
As described above, the second start port 2004 is controlled to open and close in the time-short state with an opening pattern different from the non-time-short state. In other words, if the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if the time is short, the second start port 2004 with the opening pattern A in the short release mode (0.05 seconds in this example). When the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 stops, if it is in a non-time-short state, the release pattern B in the long release mode (1.5 seconds in this example) The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

  Thus, in order to change the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 on the basis of when the normal symbol change executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the time reduction state ends (for example, the number of time reductions) In the case of the short time state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) in the short time state immediately before the 100th variation display stops, etc. When the normal symbol variation executed in step 1 stops and the second start port 2004 is opened and closed, the second start port 2004 is opened and closed with the open pattern B of the long open mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as the short-time state. Will be. In addition, when the time-short state ends after the second start port 2004 is opened, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time-short state is executed even though the time-short state has ended. In addition, there may be a case where a start winning to the second start opening 2004 occurs at an unexpected time such as after a symbol change is started in a non-time reduction state after the completion of the time reduction state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (In the non-time-short state, the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed and the second special symbol variation display is hardly executed. The start-up prize is generated and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed), and the player feels uncomfortable because of the behavior, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest will be lowered.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display (the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is stopped at the lost symbol (for example, the first special symbol display) Step S194 of one special symbol stop process), normally, “0.5 seconds” is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process (step S28) and the second special symbol process (step S39), and until the interval timer times out, the special symbol indicator (second symbol) of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. Control is performed so that the variable display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the one special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator is not started.

  In addition, when the time-shortening state ends, that is, when the symbol variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the number of time-shortenings and the symbol variation stops (time-shortening) When the last symbol variation in the state is stopped), the interval timer is set to “2 seconds” as the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started (the time during which the special symbol suspension symbol is displayed). set. As described above, in the short time state, after the second start port 2004 is changed to the open state, the second start port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting “2 seconds” to the interval timer when the last symbol change in the time-saving state stops and ends the time-saving state, the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state is started The two start ports 2004 can be changed to the closed state, and thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the start winning to the second start port 2004 after the change of the special symbol in the non-time-short state is started.

  It should be noted that the period set in the interval timer when the last symbol variation in the time reduction state stops and ends the time reduction state is at least equal to the opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 in the time reduction state (in this example, “1. 5 seconds ") or more. In addition, when the second symbol winning opening 2006 is not changed to the open state when the last symbol variation in the time-saving state is stopped and the time-shortening state is ended, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started. A time similar to a normal time (in this example, “0.5 seconds”) may be set.

  In this way, when the final special lottery result in the short-time state is derived (when the last symbol variation in the short-time state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first holding number and the second holding number, By controlling the execution of the next special lottery (winning judgment), the time-saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the short-time state is derived (after the last symbol variation in the short-time state stops) Can be terminated within the predetermined period, and an increase in the number of second reservations after the end of the time-saving control can be suppressed. As a result, the game progresses in an unintended behavior of the game designer that the start winning to the second start port 2004 occurs and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in spite of the non-time saving state. Since it is possible to suitably achieve the progress of the game in the behavior intended by the game designer (the game nature intended by the game designer), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest by not giving the player a sense of incongruity. .

  In the above-described example, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (determination as to whether or not to end the short-time state). Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to determine whether or not the time is short (for example, the normal symbol normal process (step S803) described above) Or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed). In this case, at least the fluctuation time of the normal symbol change executed in the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time reduction state (ordinary symbol change time: “0.8 seconds” in this example), and the time reduction state The opening time of the second big prize opening 2006 (in this example, “1.5 seconds”) may be equal to or longer than the total period (in this example, “2.3 seconds”).

[12. Production in advantageous state]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of the specification of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 234 (A) shows an example of a hit probability table, and FIG. 234 (B) shows an example of a big hit distribution table. The hit probability table and the big hit distribution table are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as a special symbol variation or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 include big hits and small wins.

  The hit probability table includes a large hit probability during a low probability state (ie, a non-probable state) and a high probability state (ie, a probability change state), a small hit probability (no distinction between a low probability state and a high probability state), and Define The jackpot probability is common to the special maps 1 and 2. Further, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in FIG. In other words, according to the winning probability table of FIG. 234, when winning in the special figure 2, winning is made with a high probability per small hit. In addition, from the winning of FIG. 1, the winning is not a small win, or wins with a very low probability (for example, 1/300 or less) as compared to FIG.

  In this chapter, when winning a small hit, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening / closing pattern that is closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  The jackpot distribution table defines the distribution of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won for each of the special figures 1 and 2. “2R”, “8R”, and “16R” in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and “low accuracy time shortness”, “high accuracy time shortness”, and “high accuracy time shortness” Indicates the game state to be transferred after the end.

  In addition, "Special Figure 1_8R Low Accuracy Time Short Pattern 1", "Special Figure 1_8R Low Accuracy Short Time Symbol 2", "Special Figure 1_8R Low Accuracy Time Short Pattern 3", "Special Figure 2_2R Low Accuracy Time Short Pattern 1", “Special figure 2_2R low probability time short symbol 2”, “Special figure 2_2R low probability short time symbol 3”, and “Special figure 2_2R high probability short time symbol 3” have 10 times. The number of time reductions for the “probable short time symbol 1” is 7 times, and the number of time shorts for the “special figure 2_2R low probability short time symbol 2” is 9 times.

  The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations that triggers the end of the time reduction state that starts after the jackpot game ends. That is, after entering the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends when the change of the number of times determined by the time reduction number ends. Note that the number of time reductions may be determined by the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be determined by the number of fluctuations of one special figure. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is determined by the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2. In other words, for example, the time-short state that shifts after the big hit of “Special figure 2_2R high-precision short-time pattern 1” is the fluctuation of special figure 2 even if the total number of fluctuations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 reaches seven times. If it is not finished seven times, it will not end.

  In the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are individually displayed in accordance with the extraction of special random numbers, and the fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are started. Display can be performed simultaneously (simultaneous variation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the held special random numbers are individually digested according to the progress of the fluctuation display of each special random number.

  That is, when the changing first special symbol is stopped, the change of the first special symbol held in the first special symbol memory display is started, and when the changing second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is stopped. The change of the second special symbol held in the memory display is started. Further, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed simultaneously, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbols so as to change simultaneously corresponding to the changes of the special symbols.

  When either one of the special figures 1 or 2 stops in a display mode indicating a big hit, one of the following processes is performed as a process for the other special figure during simultaneous fluctuation. . As a first processing example, the big hit game by one special figure is controlled, and the fluctuation of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped at a disengagement). In this case, even after the jackpot game is over, the change in the other special figure that has been deleted is not resumed, and the change starts in the next special figure in the other.

  As a second processing example, the jackpot game according to one special figure is controlled, and the passage of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped during the execution of the big hit game. The special figure when the big hit game is being executed and the variable stop is, for example, blinking on the special symbol display (displayed in a mode different from the case where the player is not paused (displayed in a mode in which the player can be paused)) Is done. Then, after the big hit game ends, the fluctuation display of the other special figure that has been paused is resumed from the remaining fluctuation time. As a third processing example, the jackpot game according to one special figure is controlled, the fluctuation time of the other special figure is reset, and the fluctuation of the other special figure is started again after the big hit game ends.

  In this chapter, the high-accuracy non-short-time state is a state where it is easy to obtain a small hitting ball (so-called small hitting rush). Hereinafter, an example of the specification for realizing the small hit rush only in the highly accurate non-short-time state will be described.

  First, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal lottery probability, etc. will be described. The variation time of the normal symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time-short state and the non-time-short state, and is shorter than the variation time of the special symbol variation. In both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the probability of normal winning in the normal lottery result performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 is very high (for example, 1/1). Further, when the normal symbol is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long in the short time state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-short time state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

  Next, game methods in each state will be described. As described above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high as compared to the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 234 (A)). Accordingly, in the low-probability non-short-time state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the gaming ball B is inserted into the second starting port 2004. Can be elected.

  However, in the low-accuracy non-short-time state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is very long compared to the fluctuation time of the special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 10 minutes) in the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time (for example, about 5 minutes) in the special figure 1. Therefore, the time interval between winning the small win and opening the first big winning opening 2005 is very long, and the opening and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is short and the number of opening and closing is small. Even if the variation shown in FIG. 2 is executed, it is difficult to enter the game ball B into the first big prize opening 2005 in a timely manner during the small hit game.

  Specifically, in the small hit game, the total opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the short time state. For example, a small hit game in which the first pattern that the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for about 0.5 seconds and then closed for about 1.35 seconds is executed only once, or the first big prize opening 2005 is 0.5. There is a small hit game in which the first pattern is executed once after the second pattern that is opened for about seconds and then closed for about 0.7 seconds is repeated twice.

  Even if the game ball B can be placed in the first big prize opening 2005 in a timely manner during the small hit game, the variation time of the special figure 2 is very long, so that the number of balls that are obtained per unit time can be obtained. In addition, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low-probability non-short-time state, the player moves leftward in principle and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the first start port 2002.

  On the other hand, in the time-short state (the low-accuracy short-time state and the high-accuracy short-time state), the fluctuation time in FIG. 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the variation time (for example, about 1 second) of the shortening deviation (the variation in which the reach effect is not executed) of the special figure 2 is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of the special figure 1. When the shift variation starts in the state where the special figure 2 is held in the short time state, the shortening is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the short-time state, the player performs a so-called right-handed stroke and smoothly advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 without reducing the number of balls. The game can be advanced.

  Here, since the second start port 2004 is downstream of the gate portion 2003 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5, most of the game balls B going to the second start port 2004 are mostly the second start port 2004. It passes through the gate part 2003 before reaching. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 that is opened during the small hit game is downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second start opening 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading to the first big winning opening 2005 enters the second starting opening 2004 and does not reach the first big winning opening 2005. That is, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the first grand prize winning port 2005, the game ball B needs to pass over the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is closed.

  However, in the short-time state, the opening time of the second start opening 2004 when winning a normal win is long (for example, about 6 seconds), so that the game heading toward the first big winning opening 2005 out of the game balls B hit right Most of the balls B enter the open second starting port 2004 and do not reach the first big winning port 2005. Therefore, in the short-time state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and frequently win the small hits, but cannot get the ball due to the small hit game. . In addition, since the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 is, for example, one, the special figure 2 variation can be executed without substantially reducing the number of balls in the short time state. It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

  In addition, since the first big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a position where there is almost no game ball B reaching the first big winning opening 2005 when the so-called left-handed is made, Care is also taken against the so-called strategy of trying to increase the number of game balls B by alternately repeating the right hand strike.

  Subsequently, in the high-accuracy non-short-time state, as in the short-time state, the variation time of FIG. 2 is set to be short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, in the highly accurate non-short-time state, the player performs a so-called right strike and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second start port 2004. Further, in the highly accurate non-time-short state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when winning in the normal win is a time sufficient to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), a considerable number (for example, half or more) of the game balls B that have been hit to the right pass over the closed second start opening 2004 and the first big winning opening. 2005 is reached.

  In other words, in the highly accurate non-short-time state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 to frequently win a small hit, and can win a ball due to the small hit game. With the above-described specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush that makes it easy to obtain a small hitting ball only in a highly accurate non-short-time state.

  FIG. 235 is a transition diagram showing an example of the gaming state transition of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter. As described above, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in the low-accuracy non-short-time state, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed in a state other than the low-probability non-short-time state, thereby allowing the player to advance the game smoothly. Can do. On the other hand, since the transition from the low-accuracy non-short-time state to the special figure 2 big hit and the transition from the state other than the low-accuracy non-time-short state to the special figure 1 big hit are irregular, they are indicated by dotted lines in FIG. ing.

  In any state, when a big hit is won, according to the big hit type, the state shifts to either a low-accuracy short time state, a high-accuracy short-time state, or a high-accuracy non-short-time state. In the low-accuracy short-time state, when the fluctuation of the special time 2 of the number of time reductions determined by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the low-accuracy short-time state ends, the low-accuracy short-time state shifts. In addition, in the high-accuracy short-time state, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the number of time reductions determined by the big hit type that triggers the transition to the high-accuracy short-time state ends, the high-accuracy non-short-time state, that is, the small hit rush Transition.

  The transition from the high-accuracy short-time state to the high-accuracy non-short-time state seems to be a disadvantageous transition for the player at first glance. State transition. Therefore, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling without deteriorating the interest when the highly accurate time-short state is terminated by digesting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 defined by the number of time reductions.

[12-2. Rush entry chance production]
Hereinafter, the rush entry effect, which is an effect that is executed from the start of the short-time state (the high-accuracy short-time state and the low-accuracy short-time state) will be described. Rush rush chance production is to notify that at the start of the short-time state, the current state is a short-time state, but it is unknown whether the high-precision short-time state or the low-precision short-time state is unknown. It is an effect that informs whether the state is a high-accuracy short-time state (that is, a state in which a state of transition to a high-accuracy non-short-time state, which is a small hit rush state after completion of the specified number of special 2 fluctuations) or a low-accuracy short-time state .

  236, 237, and 238 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a rush entry chance effect. 236, 237, and 238 illustrate an example in which the number of time reductions is 10 and all fluctuations in the time reduction state are out-of-range fluctuations.

  (A) is a state in which the time-saving big hit has ended. In the effect display device 1600, the same decorative design indicating the big hit is stopped. Note that the expected value of the winning ball when winning a big hit increases in the order of short hit big hit with low probability, short big hit with high probability, and short hit big hit with high probability. For example, when the “7” assortment of decorative symbols is selected, a combination of decorative symbols may be selected so that winning with high accuracy, short time and big hit is confirmed. In addition, the odds of high-precision short-time big hits are higher than the low-precision short-lived big hits when the odd-numbered decorative designs are selected than when the even-numbered decorative designs are selected. A combination of decorative symbols may be selected.

  In addition, the effect that a decorative design is promoted during a big hit may be executed. Specifically, for example, when winning a winning combination of high accuracy, short and big hits, when the symbols are fixed, the odd-numbered or even-numbered pieces are stopped, the promotion effect is executed during the big hit game, and the decorative symbols are promoted to “7”. Also good.

  (B) is a state in which the time-saving big hit has ended and the time-saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), because the short-time state has started, a so-called right-handed strike is executed, and a display (right-handed display) prompting the game ball B to enter the second start port 2004 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Yes. At the start of the short-time state, a large right-handed display (three arrows labeled “right-handed!”) In the middle and lower part of the effect display device 1600 and a small right-handed display (“ Right arrow! ”Is displayed.

  (D) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C) and the first fluctuation in FIG. 2 has started. The large right-handed display is erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, a display indicating the maximum value of the remaining short time is displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the number of time reductions is 7, 8, or 10 times. Therefore, in the state of FIG. Is displayed. In addition, a display of “Power up the character in 6 seconds!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Note that the power-up effect of the character is performed using the six variations from the first variation to the sixth variation in the special figure 2 in the short-time state. In the power-up effect, an image of the character wearing the aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color steps up in the six variations.

  For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for a power-up effect. The scenario management table stores a scenario and distribution of a power-up effect for each of the low-accuracy short-time state and the high-accuracy short-time state. The scenario shows the color of the aura at each of the six variations. In each scenario, it is assumed that the aura color in the final variation of the power-up effect has a high degree of expectation that is a highly accurate time-short state in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. Note that the rainbow color is selected only when the current state is the high-precision time-short state.

  In addition, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, white in the next variation of blue) in the six variations of each scenario. This is because there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation may be lost. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, the degree of expectation that is a high-accuracy time-short state may be set higher as the number of fluctuations reaching the final aura color is smaller. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, when reaching the red color by the sixth variation in FIG. 2 and when reaching the red color by the fourth variation in FIG. The latter has a higher expectation that the time is more accurate and shorter. Note that the former may have a higher expectation that the state is more accurate and shorter. This is because the sense of expectation can be pulled until the last (sixth) change.

  Further, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one stage with one change, may be promoted by a plurality of stages, or may not be promoted. When the aura color is promoted in multiple stages with one change, for example, the change may step up from white to blue without going through blue, or step up from white to blue to green in the change. May be. In each scenario, the aura color that is first displayed in the first variation of the special map 2 may not have the least expected level (that is, it may not be white).

  Note that “6 seconds” displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. That is, for example, as will be described later, “6 more seconds” for the first fluctuation in the short-time state (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 6 fluctuations), “ "5 seconds" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining five fluctuations). That is, since the remaining time indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until the rock destruction effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of time reductions may not be performed.

  (E) is a variation of FIG. 2 for the first time since the start of the time-short state, and is a continuation of (D). The effect display device 1600 displays a character wearing an aura and a display of “6 seconds remaining”.

  (F) is the state at the time of the end of the fluctuation in the special figure 2 for the first time after the short-time state starts. After the state of (E), until the end of the change, the aura color is promoted from white to blue, and a display (“Power Up!”) Indicating that the aura color has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. (G) is a state in which the second variation of Special Figure 2 has started since the short-time state has started. The aura color of the character remains blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays “5 seconds left”. The same effect is repeated until the fifth fluctuation of Special Figure 2.

  (H) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the sixth time after the short-time state starts. In the sixth variation of the special figure 2, the aura color is promoted to red, and a display (“Power Up!”) Indicating that the aura color is promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 236, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

  (I) is the state at the end of the special drawing 2 for the sixth time after the short-time state starts. In the sixth variation, after the aura color step-up is completed, the introduction effect of the rock destruction effect performed by the seventh to tenth variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In (I), “Destroy the rock!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the introduction effect. Only when the current state is a high-precision time-short state, the character destroys the rock in the rock destruction effect.

  (J) is the state during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the seventh time after the short-time state starts. An image in which the rock destruction effect is started and the character hits the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. During the rock destruction effect, for example, the character wears a red aura that is the final aura color of the power-up effect.

  Thereby, even during the rock destruction production, the player does not forget the expectation level that is a highly accurate time-short state. Conversely, the character may not wear the aura during the rock destruction performance. This is because there are players who do not want other players to know the expectation. When the character wears an aura during the rock destruction effect, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction effect.

  (K) is a state during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 for the seventh time after the start of the time-shortening state and a continuation of (J). When the character hits the rock, an image in a state where the rock is cracked but the rock is not broken is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (L) is the state at the time of the end of the fluctuation in FIG. A display indicating that the rock destruction effect is still continuing (“Still More !!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, the same effect is repeated.

  (M) is the state in the middle of the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 of the 8th time after a time-short state starts. In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character hits the rock again is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (N) is the state at the time of the end of the fluctuation of the special drawing 2 for the ninth time after the time-short state starts. A display (“betting on this blow!”) Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 indicating that the next fluctuation in the special figure 2 is the last fluctuation in which the rock destruction effect is performed.

  (O) is the state during the fluctuation of FIG. 2 at the tenth time (ie, at the end of the time-short state) after the time-short state has started. An image in which the character hits a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that the cracks of the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), the crack of the rock has increased from the state of (M).

  (P) is the tenth special figure 2 variation after the start of the time-shortening state and is a continuation of (O). The effect display device 1600 displays an image that succeeds in destroying the rock (that is, an image that indicates that the current state is a highly accurate time-short state and that the state shifts to the high non-time-short state at the end of the change). ing. In addition, after the image which failed in destroying a rock is displayed, a resurrection effect may be performed and the image which succeeded in destroying a rock may be displayed. (Q) is the state at the time of the end of the fluctuation in FIG. An image (“rush entry!”) Indicating the transition to the highly accurate non-short-time state is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In the case of the high-precision time-short state where the number of time reductions is seven times, the image in which the rock breaks at the seventh fluctuation in FIG. 2 and the image that shifts to the high-precision non-time-short state (ie, (P), (Q ), Except that the number of remaining times in the upper left is displayed as “4 times remaining”). Similarly, in the case of the high-precision time-short state where the number of time reductions is 9, the image in which the rock breaks at the 9th fluctuation in FIG. 2 and the image that shifts to the high-precision non-time-short state (ie, (P), ( Q), except that the remaining number of times in the upper left is displayed as “2 times remaining”).

  In the example described above, the time-short state where the number of time reductions is 7 times and 9 times is not selected in the low-accuracy time-short state. If there is a low-probability short-time state with a short time of 7 and 9 times, the rock destruction production will end with failure with a small number of fluctuations, so it will not give the player an uplifting feeling. is there.

  FIGS. 238 (P ′) and (Q ′) are examples of a rock destruction effect when the current state is a non-time-short state. (P ') is a state in which the special figure 2 is fluctuating for the 10th time after the start of the time-shortening state and continues from (O). In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character fails to destroy the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Q ') is a state in which the variation of the tenth special figure 2 has been completed since the start of the short-time state. A display indicating that the rush entry chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, the state shifts to a low-accuracy non-short-time state.

  For example, in the power-up effect, the image of the pressing operation unit 303 and the image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. Whether or not the aura color can be stepped up may be notified. Similarly, for example, in a rock destruction effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. It is also possible to notify whether rock destruction is possible.

  In addition, when the change during the short-time state, that is, during the rush entry effect is a big hit change, for example, the big hit is notified with an effect different from the effect of destroying the rock. This is to allow the player to recognize clearly whether the winner has been won or whether the transition to the high-accuracy time-short state has succeeded.

  As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the start of the change, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the variation pattern, for example. Thereafter, when the shutter group is opened, an icon indicating the type of jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Thereafter, the decorative design is stopped. On the other hand, you may alert | report the said big hit by the production which destroys a rock. As a result, the player cannot immediately recognize whether the player has won the jackpot or has shifted to the high-accuracy time-short state, and can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Production during small hit rush]
239 and 240 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects during the small hit rush. (A) is the state at the end of the final fluctuation in the high-accuracy time-short state, that is, the same state as FIG. 237 (Q). (B) is a state in which the highly accurate non-short-time state is changing. In the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a display ("In rush !!") indicating that the current state is a highly accurate non-short state (that is, during the small hit rush) is displayed.

  In (B), there is a total acquired ball number display area and a timer display area in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600. In the total acquired ball number display area, the number of balls paid out by the small hit and the big hit from the start of the small hit rush is displayed. For example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning port other than the big winning port or the starting port is not included in the total number of acquired balls.

  Note that, for example, the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls. In this case, a predetermined value is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the time of the winning. It is desirable to output the above image, to output a predetermined sound from various speakers, or to output a predetermined light from various lamps. This is to allow the player to recognize that the total number of acquired balls has increased by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening.

  The display of the total number of balls acquired continues until the end of the big hit fluctuation (that is, the high-precision short-time big hit fluctuation and the low-precision short-time big hit fluctuation) that cannot always shift to the high-accuracy non-short-time state. At the end of the change, the total number of balls acquired stops. However, if you win a big hit that does not necessarily make it possible to move to the high-accuracy non-short-time state, but if you can move to the high-accuracy non-short-time state again without falling into the low-accuracy non-short-time state, you will earn the total again The number of balls is displayed again, and the count is restarted from the value at the last count stop. In addition, although it is not always possible to make a transition to the high-accuracy non-short-time state, a big hit is won. At the start, the total number of acquired balls may be redisplayed and the count may be restarted.

  In the timer display area, the digestion time of the small hit rush counted from the start of the small hit rush is displayed. The start of the small hit rush may be at the end of the high probability short / no big hit game, or at the end of the final variation in the high accuracy short time state, or at the beginning of the first variation in the high accuracy time short state. Good.

  (C) is a state in which the high-accuracy time short and large hit fluctuation has ended in the high-accuracy non-short-time state. Since the timer in the timer display area indicates the digestion time of the small hit rush, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit fluctuation at the time of the high probability non-short time (at the end of the big hit fluctuation). (D) is a big hit game with a high accuracy, short and big hit. Even during the big hit game, the total number of acquired balls is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit, the timer may be displayed in a stopped state.

  (E) is a big hit game with high accuracy, short time, no big hit, and is a continuation of (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the effect display device 1600 displays the arrival. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the arrival display is performed every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 1000. Therefore, in (E), the display “1000PT exceeded !!” indicating that 1000 shots have been reached is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the arrival display, predetermined light may be output from various lamps, predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or BGM may be changed. For example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30000 shots), the arrival display may not be performed.

  Note that, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant, such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, ..., 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10,000 shots, It may be set such that the difference from the previous stage becomes larger as it goes to the later stage such as 20000 shots,...

  (F) is a state immediately before the end of the big hit game with a high probability timeless big hit. (G) is a state immediately after the end of the big hit game with a high probability timeless big hit. The effect display device 1600 displays a high-accuracy non-short-time state, that is, a display indicating that the small hit rush starts again. Further, in (G), there is an acquired ball number history display area in the upper middle part of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of winning balls for a single hit and the total number of winning balls for a small hit rush won for that jackpot is displayed. In (G), “2910” is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area because 2910 shots have been acquired in the big hit and the previous small hit rush.

  (H) is a state in which the total number of acquired balls has reached 5000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches the predetermined number of balls, the background image in the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the background image changes every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 5000. Along with the change of the background image, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM after the background image changes may be changed. For example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30000 shots), the background image may not be changed.

  In the example of FIG. 239, since the arrival display of the total number of acquired balls is performed every 1000 shots and the background image is changed every 5000 shots, the total number of acquired balls is 5000 shots, 10,000 shots, 15000 shots, .., The arrival display and the background image change are both executed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

  The arrival display and the change of the background image in the effect display device 1600 are executed in order according to a predetermined priority order, for example. For example, since the number of times the change of the background image is executed is smaller than the arrival display, the change of the background image can give the player a stronger sense of excitement than the arrival display. Depending on whether the background image change is executed first or later, the timing at which the player gives a stronger sense of uplift differs.

  Note that the arrival display and the change of the background image may be executed simultaneously. By executing the arrival display and the change of the background image at the same time, a synergistic effect is obtained, and it is possible to give the player a higher sense of exhilaration than when these effects are executed alone. The same applies to light and sound output executed simultaneously with arrival display and background image change.

  (I) is a state at the time of the end of fluctuations in short-term heavy hits. In order to perform a rush entry chance effect after the big hit, it is desirable that at this point in time, it is not notified whether the short-time big hit is the high-precision short-time big hit or the low-precision short-time big hit.

  (J) is a state at the time when the big hit fluctuation ends with a short time, and is a continuation of (I). The total number of balls acquired at the end of the big hit change, the accumulated time of the timer, and the result displayed on the effect display device 1600. The result is displayed at this timing because it is not always possible to shift to the high-precision non-short-time state (small hit rush) again without falling into the low-precision non-short-time state by winning the short-time big hit. It is.

  (K) is a state where there is a short time and the big hit is completed. (L) is a state where a rush entry chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final change of the rush entry chance (the final change in the short-time state) is changing, and is a state in which an effect that the rock is destroyed is being executed. (N) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation, and is a state in which the transition to the highly accurate non-short-time state is informed. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are the same as FIG. 236 (A), FIG. 236 (B), FIG. 237 (P), and FIG. 237 (Q), respectively. Description is omitted.

  (O) is a state in which the highly accurate non-short-time state is changing. In the case where the high-accuracy non-short-time state can be restored again without falling into the low-accuracy non-short-time state, for example, the display of each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the previous highly accurate non-short-time state. In addition, the total number of balls acquired in the total number of balls displayed in the total number of balls displayed area is the value obtained by adding the number of balls that were obtained in the previous short-term hit big hit to the value at the end of the previous highly accurate non-short-time state. The An image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed on the background image. In addition, in the acquired ball number history display area, a history of the total number of balls that have been earned by the short-term hit big hit and the total number of balls that have been won by the small hit rush that has been won for the time-short hit big hit is further displayed. These histories are displayed, for example, for the last 10 hits that have been won without falling into the low probability non-short-time state.

  As a result, when it is possible to return to the high-accuracy non-time-short state again without falling into the low-accuracy non-time-short state, it is possible to display the same state as the previous state, and the player can overcome the low-accuracy non-time-short state. It is possible to accurately grasp the ball that was earned without losing. In addition, if the total number of balls acquired and the timer are reset every time the high-accuracy non-short-time state is finished, the possibility that these indications will become large is reduced, and the player is raised. The display contents are as described above because the feeling cannot be given.

  In addition, as described above, the total number of winning balls in a single jackpot game and the winning balls in the highly accurate non-short time state (small hit rush) immediately before the jackpot game is displayed in the acquired ball history display area. Therefore, since a numerical value larger than an expected value of the number of balls to be earned per jackpot game can be indicated using the acquired ball number history display area, a sense of excitement can be given. In addition, for example, the display mode may be varied depending on the value displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Specifically, if it is less than 5000, it is a blue number, if it is 5000 or more and less than 10,000, it is a red number, and if it exceeds 10,000, it is a rainbow-colored number. In addition, the latest 10 times are displayed, but the 11th and subsequent times may be displayed by adding the numerical values of 1 to 10 times.

[12-4. Production during the big hit]
Hereinafter, the effect during the big hit will be described. For example, a music piece that can be played during high-accuracy short-time big hits is added every time a high-precision short-time big hit is won without falling into a low-probability non-short-time state. For example, only the music A can be selected in the first high-precision time short / long big hit that has been won without striking the low-probability non-short-time state, and the music B can be further selected in the second high-precision short / short big hit. In addition, the music C can be further selected in the third high-precision time short and big hit, and the music D can be further selected in the fourth and higher high-precision time short and big hit.

  Note that in the second and subsequent high-precision timeless big hits, the player can select music to be played from selectable music pieces by performing an operation with a predetermined operation unit. Note that if the player does not select a song, for example, the song A is won in the first high-precision time short-and-time big hit that is won without crossing the low-probability non-short-time state. It is assumed that B is a music piece C in the third high-precision time short and big hit, and a music piece D flows in the fourth and subsequent high-precision time short and big hits.

  In addition, the music that has been played during the high-accuracy short-time / big hit may continue to flow even during the high-probability non-time-short state in which the music moves after the high-precision short / no-large hit. Even in the highly accurate non-short-time state, the music may be selectable by operation of a predetermined operation unit by the player.

  FIG. 241 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect during a high-precision time-short hitless hit. Specifically, a description will be given of an effect in which all music pieces can be selected by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during a high-precision time-saving hit.

  (A) is a state in which the second high-accuracy short-time big hit that has been elected without falling into the low-probability time-short state has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high-accuracy time short-and-large hit is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, since it is the second high-precision time-short hit big hit that won without falling into the low-probability non-short-time state, music A and music B can be selected, and the music in the state where the input of the operation unit by the user is not accepted B is selected.

  These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives a first round start command from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, an operation reception period of the operation unit for executing the music selection operation starts. The operation reception period ends when, for example, the peripheral control MPU receives a round end command for the final round from the main control MPU.

  In the example of FIG. 241, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the cursor for selecting the music A and the music B moves, and by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a, It changes to the music pointed to.

  The hidden command operation acceptance period starts when, for example, the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU and ends when the second round end command is received. . (C) is a state after the hidden command is input in (B). All music (music A to D) can be selected.

  The hidden command is, for example, a command for long-pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or more). As described above, the hidden command operation reception period overlaps with the music selection operation reception period.

  In music selection, the peripheral control MPU changes the central pressing operation unit 303a from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and the pressed state is not a long press (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for more than 3 seconds) ), The determination of the music is executed.

  If the central pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, when the music is determined, the player intends to execute the hidden command, but the music determination is executed. There is a risk that the operation will not be continued until the long-pressed state, which is a hidden command, is mistaken for the wrong operation. In addition, if the music is determined when the center pressing operation unit 303a is in the long-pressed state and the state is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, the music is always obtained when the hidden command is executed. Since the determination is performed, there is a risk of discomfort to the player. Accordingly, the determination of the music is executed when the above-described conditions are satisfied.

  Note that, for example, in the operation for notifying the winning result of the effect during reach and the determination operation on the character selection screen, which will be described later, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way. It may be determined that the center pressing operation unit 303a has been operated.

[13. Demo screen production]
[13-1. Normal demonstration screen production]
Hereinafter, a demonstration example of the demonstration screen when the change is not executed will be described. FIG. 242 is an example of a time table for a demo screen. In the time table, the display contents on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display contents, whether or not the volume adjustment jog is accepted, whether or not the volume light quantity adjustment jog is accepted, whether or not the BGM is flowing, and a predetermined movable body (role In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the rear back movable decorative body 3110 is in a fall state.

  In a state where the volume adjustment jog can be received, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image indicating the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted. In a state in which the volume light quantity adjustment jog can be received, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image indicating one of the volume or the light quantity is displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in a state in which it is being displayed, an image indicating the other of the volume or the amount of light is displayed and the other can be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110 is a decorative body that is movable in the vertical direction. The back movable decorative body 3110 is located at the above-described retracted position above the game board 5 or the above-described appearance position at the center of the game board 5 according to the effect state.

  Hereinafter, a specific flow of production in the demonstration screen will be described. First, fluctuation or jackpot is executed (NO1). At the end of the change or big hit, the decorative design stops on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). Thereafter, when there is no change hold, the fixed decorative symbol is kept stopped (NO3). In each of NO1 to NO3, the volume adjustment jog reception is possible, the volume light quantity adjustment jog reception is not possible, the fluctuation BGM is flowing, and the back movable ornament 3110 is not in the fall state, that is, in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section where the volume adjustment jog reception is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach production or during a predetermined round of big hit.

  Subsequently, a predetermined video is displayed (NO4-1). Subsequently, a telop image (also referred to as volume light intensity adjustment telop) indicating that the predetermined video is displayed and transition to the volume light intensity adjustment screen, and a character for determining the effect state after the change are performed. A telop image (also referred to as a character selection telop) indicating that transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

  For example, the video reproduced in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a video for 30 seconds, and is reproduced in a loop between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In both NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume adjustment jog reception is not possible, the volume light quantity adjustment jog reception is possible, and the back movable ornament 3110 is in the retracted position. However, BGM is flowing in NO4-1, but BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (the volume decreases and eventually stops).

  Subsequently, a model demo movie of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then a manufacturer logo is displayed (NO6), then a jog button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then a demo screen common to all manufacturers (Goto) Action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

  Further, after that, the volume light quantity adjustment telop and the character selection telop are displayed while the predetermined video is displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as that of NO4-2. After the display content of NO9 is displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, volume control jog acceptance is not possible, volume light intensity adjustment jog acceptance is possible, and BGM is not flowing.

  Hereinafter, the operation of the back movable decorative body 3110 will be described. At the start of the model demonstration movie in NO5, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and falls, that is, at the appearance position. Thereafter, in NO6 to NO9, the back movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearance position. In NO9, when moving to the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen, the back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the retracted position in order to make the effect display device 1600 easier to see. In this case, for example, when the display of the volume light intensity adjustment screen and the character selection screen is completed, the back movable ornament 3110 is moved again to the appearance position.

  In NO5 to NO9, the back movable decorative body 3110 that is not located at the retreat position moves to the retreat position when the game ball B enters the start port (the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). In NO5, when the game ball B enters the start port while the back movable ornament 3110 is falling from the retreat position to the appearance position, for example, the back movable ornament 3110 is detected at the timing when the entrance is detected. To raise. Thereby, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the retracted position simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the entry, and the visual recognition of the effect using the effect display device 1600 of the change is prevented as much as possible. That's it.

  Further, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the start port while the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. You may raise after making it. This is because, if an irregular operation is started in which the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 that is descending suddenly starts to rise at the same time as the entry, there is a player who misunderstands this as a high-hit expectation.

  Moreover, you may determine operation | movement of the back movable decoration 3110 according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation | variation performed by the said entrance. For example, a variation pattern in which an effect of lowering the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation is described. In NO5 to NO9, a variation pattern is selected in which a game ball B enters with the back movable ornament 3110 positioned at the appearance position, and an effect that the back movable ornament 3110 descends at the start of variation is selected. It shall be assumed.

  In this case, for example, simultaneously with entering the ball, the back movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to the retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is executed. When the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot, it is desirable that the descending effect is executed without canceling (that is, the descending effect is generated with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the back movable decorative body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from a speaker) may be performed. The back movable ornament 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

  Further, for example, instead of the descent effect, a specific irregular operation of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (for example, the back back movable decorative body 3110 is reciprocated up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude) is performed. Good. Even if the descending effect is an effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by executing these irregular processes instead of the descending effect. In the first place, in NO5 to NO9, when the back movable ornament 3110 is not in the retracted position, a variation pattern in which an effect that the back movable ornament 3110 descends at the start of variation is executed (a descending effect is performed at the start of variation). Selection of the production pattern) may be prohibited. In addition, although the selection of the variation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that a descent effect will appear), the descent effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing in this way, even if it is a case where a descent effect is not performed, a player can be made to think that the descent effect may have been selected.

  Further, in NO5, the variation pattern in which the game ball B enters the starting port while the back movable ornament 3110 moves to the appearance position, and the effect that the back movable ornament 3110 descends at the start of the variation is executed. The same is true when is selected.

  Specifically, in this case, for example, simultaneously with entering the ball, the back movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to the retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum lowered position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. Execute. Note that the back movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the appearance position once before the ascent (that is, the effect of descending is generated with a delay). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. In addition, before the said raise, you may move the back back movable decoration body 3110 to an appearance position once. In the first place, selection of the variation pattern (an effect pattern in which a descent effect is executed at the start of the change) may be prohibited.

  Further, in NO5 to NO9, when the back movable ornament 3110 is positioned below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting port, and another movable body (with the back and back movable ornament 3110 and the start of variation). It is assumed that a variation pattern in which an effect of moving the different movable body) to the movable range of the back movable decorative body 3110 is selected at the time of entering the ball. In this case, for example, the back movable movable body 3110 is first moved to the retracted position, and then the other movable body is moved to avoid interference between the movable bodies. Further, when the back movable ornament 3110 is in the appearance position and does not interfere with the back movable ornament 3110 in the appearance position even if the other movable body (a movable body different from the back movable ornament 3110) operates. In other words, the other movable body is operated while the back movable ornament 3110 is in the appearance position, and after the other movable body returns to the initial position, the back movable ornament 3110 is moved to the retracted position. May be. In such a case, the movement of the back back movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of a movable body different from the back back movable decorative body 3110 may be performed simultaneously.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (a movable body different from the back movable ornament 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the above-described irregular production or irregular operation may be executed for the back movable ornament 3110 or the other movable body. In the first place, in such a case, selection of a variation pattern (effect pattern) in which an effect that another movable body moves to the movable range of the back movable decorative body 3110 at the start of the variation may be prohibited.

  Note that when the back movable ornament 3110 is at the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, some players feel that the visual state of the video displayed on the effect display device 1600 in NO5 to NO9 is not good, and such a player feels that he wants to watch the video in a good visual state.

  For such a player, the game ball B enters the start opening (when the game ball B enters the start opening, the fluctuation starts and these images (for example, the model demonstration movie shown in FIG. 242 stops) The back movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by an opportunity other than (because the time image etc.) ends. As a specific opportunity, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b).

  If the game ball B wins the start opening while the back movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the retracted position due to an opportunity other than the game ball B entering the start opening, the back moving is possible. The decorative body 3110 continues the ascending operation, for example, and returns to the retracted position. In addition, while the back movable ornament 3110 is moving up to the retreat position, the game ball B wins the start opening, and the effect pattern determined based on the winning moves down the back movable ornament 3110. In the case of the effect pattern, the back movable ornament 3110 may be lowered after the back movable ornament 3110 is continuously lifted and returned to the retracted position. Even in the middle of ascending 3110, the descending effect may be executed. Further, when the game ball B wins the start opening in a state where the back movable decorative body 3110 returns to the retracted position by an opportunity other than the game ball B entering the start opening, for example, as it is Maintain the retracted position.

  Note that the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back movable ornament 3110 is in the appearance position (the symbol that is also shown in the video when the NO2 decorative symbol is NO9) is, for example, at the end of change (NO2 The image may be displayed in a reduced size as compared with the symbol shown in FIG. When the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, for example, the display size of the decorative symbol is changed at NO5 when the back movable ornament 3110 starts to descend, at the end of descending, or when the NO3 confirmed symbol is displayed. . Further, when displaying a decorative pattern in a reduced size, it may be displayed in an area that does not overlap the movement range of the back movable ornament 3110. However, even in the case of a reduced display, the movement range of the back movable decoration 3110 is not changed. You may make it overlap.

  In addition, in NO5 to NO9, the example in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 has been described. However, instead of or in addition to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, another movable body is an effect display device. It may be located in front of 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are located on the front surface of the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to use a plurality of movable bodies whose positions after movement do not overlap (contact). In NO5 to NO9, since the video is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body that cannot visually recognize the video is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to make the explanation to the player, such as a volume light quantity adjustment telop, invisible. Even if the position after the movement is a movable body that overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 once in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, The movable body may be returned to the original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player such as the volume light quantity adjustment telop may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume control]
Hereinafter, another example of the volume adjustment method will be described. FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of screen transition for volume adjustment. (A) is a state in which the decorative symbol determined after the change is stopped, that is, the state of NO3 in FIG. (B) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, the state of NO4-1 in FIG.

  (C) is a state in which the loop video and the character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. It differs from NO4-2 in FIG. 242 in that the volume light quantity adjustment telop is not displayed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of (C), the screen changes to the character selection screen. In the example of FIG. 243, the volume adjustment (adjustment and setting of output sound output from various speakers) is not performed after passing through the character selection screen. It is different from the example of FIG. 242 in that it cannot be omitted.

  (D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of (C). The character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the selected character can be determined by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a.

  Note that the character selected here appears in the effect display device 1600 during a predetermined effect, and performs a predetermined speech effect or performs a predetermined action. In other words, the subsequent effect mode changes depending on the selected character. In addition, the contents of the effect when the character appears (for example, the above-mentioned lines and actions) differ depending on the selected character. In addition, for example, the volume of speech at the time of production differs for each character. Further, for example, the BGM varies depending on the selected character.

  (E) is a state where the character is determined by pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a in the state of (D). At the time of character determination, for example, a speech by the character is output from a speaker. The speech is output at a volume equivalent to that of the character's speech effect performed during, for example, a change.

  For example, there are many players who feel that the speech production by the character A is noisy even at a volume of 3 (5 levels (1 is the minimum volume, 5 is the maximum volume)), and the speech production by the character B is noisy even at the volume of 5. Many players feel. In this way, the player can select an appropriate sound volume for himself / herself by enabling the sound volume adjustment after actually listening to the character dialogue when determining the character.

  (F) shows the state after the character selection. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is deleted and, for example, a display different from the volume adjustment screen such as the loop video described above is displayed. The reason why such a screen is displayed before it is possible to shift to the volume control screen is to prevent the player from performing volume control as a simple task.

  Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the character A having a loud speech effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen shifts to the volume adjustment screen immediately after the character A is determined, the player does not think of anything but performs an operation for reducing the volume. On the other hand, once the display different from the volume adjustment as described above is displayed, the consciousness is separated from the character selected by the player, so some players forget the character they have selected before the volume adjustment can be executed. Yes. Since the player reduces the volume while remembering that he has selected the character A, when the line of the character A subsequently appears, the player can reassure that the selected character is the character A. And you can get joy.

  In (G), a loop image, a character selection telop, and a volume light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) is a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G), and the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the sound volume is changed, and when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. Although illustration is omitted, in the light amount adjustment screen, the light amount is changed by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the screen is shifted to the volume adjustment screen by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a.

  (I) is a state in which a loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, on the volume adjustment screen or the light amount adjustment screen, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the last time the rotation operation unit 302 or the center pressing operation unit 303a was operated, the loop image is displayed again.

  In addition, when a fluctuation | variation starts in the state in which the volume adjustment screen is displayed on the production | presentation display apparatus 1600, volume adjustment can be performed continuously, and the image for performing volume adjustment shows the visibility of the production in fluctuation. Continuous display is possible in a mode that does not significantly disturb. Thereby, the volume adjustment can be executed while checking the actual volume during the fluctuation.

  In addition, although the example which cannot transfer to the volume light quantity adjustment screen without going through the character selection screen has been described, in addition to or instead of going through the character selection screen, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the process moves to the volume light quantity adjustment screen. It may not be possible. As the specific conditions, for example, there is a game ball B entering a general winning port where a prize ball is obtained at the time of entering, and a predetermined time (or a combination thereof).

  Note that the predetermined time may be longer or shorter depending on the operating status of the operating means that can be operated by the player, for example. In addition, when the condition for changing the volume (output sound) is satisfied, the volume (output sound) may be changed without going through the character selection screen. Further, the changed volume (output sound) may be ended at the end of the specific number of changes. Note that in a specific effect that is fluctuating, the effect may be advanced with a volume (output sound) unique to the specific effect, instead of the selected volume (output sound). In addition, the number of volume patterns that can be selected on the volume adjustment screen may be increased by performing a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit after the character selection and before the transition to the volume adjustment screen ( For example, when the predetermined operation is not executed, five levels of sound (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is executed, ten levels of sound (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Rise production]
Hereinafter, the rise effect will be described. The rising effect is one of the effects performed during SP reach (a special effect, and the SP reach described in the following explanation also corresponds to a special effect). The SP reach is a reach effect that is more easily selected in the big hit variation and less likely to be selected in the outlier variation than the normal reach effect. That is, the SP reach is a reach production with a high expectation degree of big hits as compared with a normal reach production. In the uplifting effect, a display indicating the expected degree of jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When a line “Kara ~ no ~” described later is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the line is displayed. The jackpot expectation displayed in is promoted.

  FIG. 244 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rising effect. (A) is a state in which the rising effect is started during the SP reach. On the effect display device 1600, for example, the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the effect display device 1600 is changed. The background color after the change is assumed to be blue or red. In addition, it is assumed that red is more likely to be selected as the background color after the change than blue when the expectation of jackpot for the change is higher.

  Subsequently, in (C), a line “Kara ~ no ~” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image and background color of the center pressing operation portion 303a are deleted. In (C), the image and background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be continuously displayed. When that line is displayed, the jackpot expectation is promoted. Subsequently, in (D), the line is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in a blurred state again. For example, the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is promoted from blue to red at the timing when the line is deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (E), the blurred image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are deleted, and a large image (red large push display) of the red center pressing operation unit 303a is clearly displayed in an effect display device. 1600 and prompted to press the center pressing operation portion 303a. The image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this time includes, for example, a small blue image (blue small push display), a large blue image (blue large push display), and a large red image (large red). There is a large rainbow-colored image (rainbow push display). The big hit expectation is assumed to increase in the order of blue small push display, blue large push display, red large push display, and rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only in the big hit fluctuation.

  In the state of (E), when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation effective state and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation effective state, a notification is made as to whether the variation being executed is a big hit variation or a deviation variation. Is done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation.

  In (A), the effect from the display of the blurred image of the center pressing operation unit 303a to the time immediately before the clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in (E) An effect from when a clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed until the display of the image is terminated is also referred to as a button display effect.

  FIG. 245 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the rising effect. In the example of FIG. 244, the line “Kara ~ no ~” is displayed in the roaring effect and the background color in the roaring effect is promoted, but in the example of FIG. "~" Is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

  (A) and (B) are the same as FIGS. 244 (A) and (B), respectively, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are deleted, and the large blue push image is displayed in a clear state on the effect display device 1600, and the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. You are prompted to do so.

  Subsequently, in (D), the effect display device 1600 displays a line “Kara ~ no ~” so as to overlap the image of the central pressing operation portion 303a. In (D), in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line “Kara ~ no ~”, the image of the central pressing operation section 303a and the display for prompting the pressing may be deleted. Subsequently, in (E), the line “Kara ~ no ~” is deleted from the effect display device 1600, and the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image at the timing when the line is deleted. . (F) is the same as FIG. 244 (F), and a description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, when performing the promotion effect during the button display effect, the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is effective during the period from when the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed in the button display effect until the promotion effect appears. It may be invalid. Since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective during this period, it is possible to satisfy a player who wants to know the winning result quickly. In addition, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid during the period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to enjoy the production until the end, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. When the operation is invalid, it is determined that the promotion effect is performed, and the player can feel a sense of exaltation.

  In this way, in order to avoid that it is determined that the promotion effect is performed when the operation is invalid in spite of the display of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a, the button display is performed. Regardless of whether or not the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be validated for a predetermined time after the button display effect starts.

  It should be noted that there may be a pattern in which only the button display effect is executed in the uplifting effect without executing the turning effect. The type of image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different between the case where the turn effect is executed and the case where only the button display effect is executed without executing the turn effect. .

  Specifically, for example, in a pattern in which a roaring effect is executed, only a blue large push, a red large push, and a rainbow push can be displayed in a button display effect, but in a pattern in which no roaring effect is executed, Suppose that a small push, a blue large push, a red large push, and a rainbow large push may be displayed. As a result, the pattern in which the roaring effect is executed has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the pattern in which the roaring effect is not executed.

  In such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the turning effect is executed has a higher appearance frequency than the pattern in which the turning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. This is because, as described above, the pattern in which the roaring effect is executed has a higher degree of expectation for jackpot. In addition, for example, in a pattern in which the roaring effect is not executed, BGM flows in the button display effect. However, in the pattern in which the roaring effect is executed, the BGM is stopped in the button display effect while the BGM is played. It is desirable to be in a state. As a result, it is possible to produce a sense of tension in the button display effect in a pattern in which a roaring effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is executed.

  In addition, for example, when the variation is a big hit variation, the turn effect is executed, and the center press operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period of the center press operation unit 303a in the button display effect. A pattern in which an effect in which the vibration speaker 354 vibrates is executed may be executed.

  FIG. 246 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the timing at which the promotion effect in the rising effect is performed. The promotion effect can be executed, for example, at any one of timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. Timing 1 is immediately after the start of the production effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 244 (A) or the timing immediately after the start of (B)). At timing 1, the player cannot recognize or slightly recognize the initial background color in the roaring effect, so when the promotion effect is performed at timing 1, Can give a sense of surprise.

  Timing 2 is a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the roaring effect (for example, the timing in FIG. 244 (C)). At timing 2, the player can fully recognize the first background color in the roaring effect. For example, if the background color is blue, the player is discouraged, but the promotion effect is performed at timing 2. Therefore, this discouragement can be eliminated.

  Timing 3 is simultaneously with the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 245 (C)). In the example of FIG. 246, it is assumed that the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a ends simultaneously with the end of the button display effect.

  At timing 3, the player is in a state where the type of image of the center pressing operation unit 303 a displayed in the button display effect is not recognized, and therefore, when the promotion effect is performed at timing 3, the player is given a sense of surprise. Can do. In addition, when the promotion effect is performed at the timing 3, the player has not yet recognized the type of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a, but at least the image with the lowest expectation degree of big hit (blue small push) Since it is determined that there is no such thing, an exhilaration feeling can be obtained.

  Timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, timing immediately after the start of FIG. 245 (C)). Specifically, the timing 4 is a difficult timing although the player can operate the central pressing operation unit 303a, for example, after the lapse of 0.008 seconds from the start of the button display effect. At timing 4, the player is in a state where the recognition of the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect is light, so that when the promotion effect occurs, the player can be given a surprise feeling.

  In addition, for a player who knows that a promotion effect can occur at timing 4, the effective period starts, for example, by repeatedly hitting the central pressing operation unit 303a before the start of the button display effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game characteristic that the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a can be executed prior to the promotion effect.

  Timing 5 is a timing after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 5, the player can fully recognize the image type of the central pressing operation unit 303a. For example, if the image is a blue small push, the player is discouraged, but at timing 5, the promotion effect is given. This disappointment can be resolved by performing the above.

  Timing 6 is a timing after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the button display effect (however, the latter half of the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has elapsed since the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a was displayed, it is possible to show the promotion effect to a player who has given up half the appearance of the promotion effect. Therefore, a sense of surprise can be provided.

  Timing 7 is immediately before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at timing 7, for example, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted to be pressed, the promotion effect can be shown to a player who is not willing to operate the central pressing operation unit 303a. . Further, for example, if the effective period of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect is generated even after the button display effect is started, the freeze effect is performed by executing the promotion effect at the timing 6 or the timing 7. An effect such as an effect can be realized, and the player can have a strong sense of expectation.

  When the promotion effect is executed after the start of the button display effect, the pressing of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be triggered by the execution of the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect until the promotion effect timing (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7), although the image of the center press operation unit 303a is displayed, the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is invalid. It is said. Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the effective period of the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts.

  When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed within the valid period, a promotion effect is generated, and the operation becomes invalid during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after the promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation valid period starts again. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation effective period, a winning result in the change is notified.

  In addition, for example, although the effective period of the center press operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press is performed between the start of the button display effect and the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a promotion effect may occur. Thereafter, when the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period after the promoted button image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning result of the change is notified. It should be noted that the pattern for performing the promotion effect after the start of the button display effect is preferably selected only when the big hit changes (that is, the pattern in which the big hit is determined). Assuming that the pattern is selected in the deviation variation, the player operates the center pressing operation unit 303a in the expectation that the winning result will be announced by the button effect, but the player has unexpectedly expanded (whether it is a big hit or not) This is because there is a risk that it will become a shoulder watermark.

  In addition, for example, although the effective period of the center press operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the center press is performed between the start of the button display effect and the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any one of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect that expects the promotion effect to be generated (for example, a line effect such as “Don't be impatient! I'll be promoted soon!”) May be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is performed at a predetermined promotion timing instead of performing the promotion effect at the timing when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed as described above.

  Also, for example, when the promotion effect occurs after the button display effect starts, immediately after the dialogue “ka ~ ra ~ no ~” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, after the promotion, the ringing effect is once again executed, and then The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the previous turn effect, the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. Good.

  Specifically, for example, when the squealing effect ends with a blue background and the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect and then “Kara ~ no ~” is displayed, the promotion is then promoted to a red background. The button display effect may be performed in which a blue effect is displayed. Also, specifically, for example, when the whirling effect ends with a blue background, and a blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, “Kara ~ no ~” is displayed, then the blue background In other words, a button display effect in which a red push display is displayed may be performed.

  Moreover, although the example mentioned above demonstrated the example in which a promotion effect is performed only by one of a roaring effect or a button display effect, a promotion effect may be performed by both. Further, a plurality of promotion effects may be executed within one turn effect and one button display effect. In addition, although the example in which the background color changes is described as the turning effect, in addition to the background color, it is displayed before the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed and overlaps the area where the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. There is no need to be concerned with the background color, such as changing the color of the effect (light gathering effect, etc.) displayed in.

[15. Hold notice effect]
[15-1. Reservation notice effect due to change in hold color]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Until the hold display is consumed, the display mode of the hold display is displayed. Is changed, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display. Further, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes.

  Specifically, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of a game ball (a start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. . Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the pending number designation command and the advance determination command are received in the command analysis process of step S601, the pending number specified from the pending advance notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the pending number designation command. (Pending memory count) and pre-determination information specified from the pre-determination command (big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose) select the hold advance notice determination table, and the determination set in the hold advance notice determination table The type of the holding notice pattern set in the holding notice determination table is determined by comparing the value with the read random number for determining the notice of holding.

  In addition, in the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern is different for each pre-judgment information specified by the pre-judgment command (either big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose). The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

  Further, when a game ball wins (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (the number of stored memories) specified from the hold number designation command is increased, thereby producing an effect display. One hold display is added to the device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the hold number (holding memory number) specified by the hold number designation command is decreased. Then, the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern. Each time the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on another hold display is started (start condition is satisfied), the display mode of the hold display can be changed.

  In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the hold display is deleted. Even after the start of variable display (variable display of special symbols), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changeable. In such a case, the position at which the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves before and after the start of the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display, in the same manner as other hold displays. It may be made to suggest the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes due to the execution of the hold change effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 247, 248, and 249, a description will be given of the reservation color determination table in which a plurality of types of reservation color patterns are set for each number of reservations (the number of storages to be stored) specified by the reservation number designation command. To do. The pending notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 247 (A) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting port without hold and during non-variable execution. FIG. 247 (B) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the start opening without any hold and during execution of fluctuation. FIG. 248 (C) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the start opening with one hold. FIG. 249 (D) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the starting opening in a state where there are two holds. FIG. 249 (E) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins the start opening in a state where there are three holds. Note that it is not necessary to use a prior determination command to determine the hold color when there is no hold and the variable is not being executed.

  In the reserved color determination table, a pattern indicating a reserved color at a timing when the reserved color can be changed, distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, and distribution in the deviation variation are defined. Note that when the change 1 starts, the change starts when the color change target hold by the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). It is. Similarly, at the start of the change 2 holding, the change started when the color change target hold by the pattern is the second hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). It's time. Similarly, when the retention 3 change is started, the change in the state in which the color change target hold by the pattern is the third hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed three times in advance). It is time to start.

  The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. Note that the allocation in the reserved color determination table is determined in advance so that the big hit expectation degree increases in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. Further, the distribution is predetermined so that the rainbow color is selected only when the big hit changes.

  Note that, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, a change to a reserved color with a low expectation level for jackpots is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. If there is a possibility of changing to a reserved color with a low jackpot expectation level, even if the reserved color becomes a color with a high expectation level, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation.

  The reserved color determination table includes a pattern in which color promotion is performed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern that changes from red to blue when the reserved color is white. Due to the presence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the reserved color change, even if it remains white, there is still a possibility that it will change at a stretch to a color with a high expectation level for big hits. Expectation can be maintained until the end.

  Further, for example, a reserved color of blue or higher may be selected only for reach variation, or a reserved color of red or higher may be selected only for variation in which SP reach is executed. In addition, when the variation is suspended in the state where the big hit variation is included in the variation being executed or pending, the peripheral control MPU forcibly sets all the reserved color change patterns for the variation to white (that is, You may determine to the pattern which consists of a standard color.

  FIG. 250 is an example of a changing pending color determination table. In the change pending color determination table, during the execution of the change, the pattern indicating the hold color at the timing when the change hold color can change, the distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, the distribution in the deviation variation, the variation in each variation pattern, Defined for each hold color at the start. In other words, the peripheral control MPU determines the on-hold color change pattern that is changing according to the on-hold color at the start of the change, the change pattern of the change, and whether the change is a hit change or a deviation change.

  In the example of FIG. 250, three promotion timings are defined for each variation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each variation pattern. Further, the promotion timing itself may be different for each variation pattern. For example, in the executed fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach is changed, the promotion timing includes, for example, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, and when the SP reach second half starts. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree and change pattern of each reserved color are the same as those in the reserved color determination table.

  FIG. 251 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold notice effect due to a change in hold color. (A) is a state where there is no change hold and the change is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 in a state where the change is performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table in FIG. 247 (B) is referred to, and the reserved color at the time of winning and at the start of variation is determined to be green.

  (C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which the variation corresponding to the green suspension has started. (E) is a state in which the change has reached a reach. In (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state that has developed into SP reach in the fluctuation. In (F), the hold remains green. (G) shows a state in which the second half of the SP reach has started in this change. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Reservation notice effect due to gacha coin change]
So far, the hold notice effect by the change in hold color has been described. Hereinafter, the hold notice effect by displaying the hold as gacha coin and changing the hold will be described. In the hold notice effect, for example, the hold is displayed in the form of coins (hereinafter referred to as gacha coins) at the time of winning a prize, and the number of coins increases or the coins that differ from the normal form (hereinafter referred to as the hold) move. , Called Rare Gacha Coin).

  For example, at the start of the change corresponding to the hold, the effect display device 1600 executes the same number of gacha gacha as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins, and acquires the same number of hold displays. And the hold display which shows the fluctuation | variation currently being performed changes into the hold display of the color with the highest expectation degree of jackpots among the acquired said hold displays. In addition, you may make it perform not only the hold display change to the color with the highest expectation degree of big hits but the change to any hold display among the displayed hold displays. In addition, although hold of gacha coin or rare gacha coin is displayed, gacha gacha may not be executed at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold, and gacha coin or rare gacha coin hold may be displayed.

  A gacha coin hold determination table in which a plurality of types of gacha coin hold patterns are set for each hold number (holding storage number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 252, 253, and 254. . The gacha coin hold determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 252 (A) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the starting slot without hold and during non-variable execution. FIG. 252 (B) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the starting slot without any hold and during execution of fluctuation. FIG. 253 (C) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the start opening with one hold. FIG. 254 (D) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the start opening in a state where there are two holds. FIG. 254 (E) is a gacha coin hold determination table that is used when the game ball B wins the start opening in a state where there are 3 holds. Note that it is not necessary to use a prior determination command to determine whether or not to hold a gacha coin when there is no hold and no change is being executed.

  In the gacha coin hold determination table, similarly to the hold color determination table, a pattern indicating the type and number of gacha coins at a timing at which the hold color can be changed, distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, distribution in the deviation variation, Is defined.

  The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha coins indicated by the pattern. In addition, the allocation in the gacha coin hold determination table is determined in advance so that the big hit expectation degree increases in the order of one gacha coin, three gacha coins, five gacha coins, one rare gacha coin, and five rare gacha coins. It has been. Further, even five rare gacha coins having the highest expectation level for big hits may be selected based on the deviation variation.

  Similar to the reserved color determination table, each pattern of the gacha coin reservation determination table is not changed to a gacha coin with a low expectation of big hit. Similarly to the hold color determination table, the gacha coin hold determination table has a pattern in which a plurality of stages of gacha coin promotion are executed. In addition, when the fluctuation is held in a state where the big hit fluctuation is included in the fluctuations being executed or being held, the peripheral control MPU is forced to display normal white hold instead of gacha coin hold. You may make it do.

  In the illustrated gacha coin hold determination table, when gacha coin hold is displayed, gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning a prize. For example, a normal white hold is displayed at the time of winning a prize. There may be a pattern in which the hold changes to gacha hold before the start of the change corresponding to the hold. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes to a gacha coin after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because the sense of expectation that the reserved color has been promoted may be lowered.

  FIG. 255 is an example of a gacha coin reserved color correspondence table. In the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gacha coins at the start of change and the hold color with the highest expectation of big hits among the hold indications acquired by gacha gacha at the start of change, and the big hit fluctuation and deviation The distribution for which the correspondence for each variation is selected is defined.

  The gacha coin reserved color correspondence table is set so that a situation in which only a white suspend display can be acquired, although gacha gacha is executed with gacha coins, is performed. This is because, when such a situation occurs, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation for the performance in which the gacha-gacha is executed.

  Note that “coin” in the hold color column indicates that the change is executed while the hold is displayed as a gacha coin or a rare gacha coin without being executed. In the gacha coin hold determination table, the expectation of jackpot when the gacha gacha is not executed is set low, but the gacha gacha is executed in the case of five rare gacha coins having the highest expectation degree of jackpot as shown in FIG. If not, the jackpot may be set to be confirmed. The gacha coin reserved color correspondence table may not include a pattern in which gacha gacha is not executed. That is, in this case, when a hold display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins appears, the display always changes to a hold display having a big hit expectation degree equal to or higher than the blue hold.

  As for the big hit fluctuation, the allocation to “coin” indicating that the change is executed while the display of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is not executed, and the gacha gacha is not executed. The ratio of change to the colored hold display is set for any one of 5 sheets, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins (in the case of 1 coin, 32 / It is still a coin at 128, but it changes to some color at 96/128). This is to suppress the end of the coin as much as possible because the expectation is generally higher when the display changes to the colored hold display.

  Note that, according to the distribution indicated by the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, the hold color with the highest expectation level is determined for a plurality of hold displays obtained using a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins. For example, the color of the reserved display other than the highly anticipated reserved color is determined at random.

  Specifically, for example, when three coins have been acquired and it is determined that red is displayed as the reserved color, the reserved color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red It is determined at random from “coins”, “blue”, “green”, and “red”, excluding the rainbow color. Also, it is not random. For example, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are patterns 1, “green”, “green”, and “red” are patterns 2, “blue”, “red”, and “red” are patterns 3 in advance. A plurality of patterns may be provided for each number of coins and the final color and determined from the patterns. In addition, when the reserved color with the highest expectation degree of big hit is not determined (when one of the displayed reserved colors is determined), for example, the pattern 2 is more likely to be promoted to red than the pattern 1 or the like. It is good to set.

  Note that, in the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, all the colors of the hold display acquired by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the reserved color with the highest expectation level for the big hit is the same, it is preferable that the distribution is set so that the higher the expected number for the big hit, the higher the number of reserved displays having the reserved color. For example, using 3 gacha coins, the “red, blue, white” on-hold display is obtained, and the on-hold display changes to red. If the hold display changes to red, the big hit expectation is higher).

  Note that the change pattern of the hold display in the change after the change to the colored normal hold display at the start of the change by the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is determined by using the changing hold color determination table in FIG. That is, even if it is a gacha coin hold advance notice, after changing to a colored normal hold display, the hold change pattern based on the hold color is used as in the case where the hold color change notice continues. However, for each pattern in the on-change pending color determination table of FIG. 250, whether the distribution at the time of big hit fluctuation of each pattern is different from the distribution at the time of deviation deviation between when the gacha coin reservation notice is passed and when it is not passed Good.

  In the example described above, the effect that the gacha coin hold is changed to the hold color display due to the gacha gacha is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gacha coin, but is executed at another timing after the start of the change. Also good. The timing includes, for example, immediately before reach establishment, immediately after reach establishment, and at the time of SP reach development when SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image that prompts the operation of the specific operation unit is displayed during the reach effect and an effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is executed, the last timing is before the display of the image starts. Is desirable.

  For example, if the final hold color is the same, the hold color is higher so that the big hit expectation is higher when the gacha coin hold notice is passed than when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed. It is desirable that sorting is set in the determination table, the gacha coin reserved color correspondence table, and the like.

  In the above-described example, the number of stages of gacha coin hold (5 stages of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of stages of the reserved color (Five levels of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) are the same, but may be different. When the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages for holding the gacha coin is larger. Since the gacha coin hold finally changes to the hold of the colored display, the player recognizes the final jackpot expectation by holding the colored display. That is, if the number of stages of the reserved color is large, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final jackpot expectation degree unless he / she remembers the order of the jackpot expectation degree of all the colors.

  Although not shown, in the peripheral control ROM, for example, a distribution in which a gacha coin hold display is selected and a normal hold display (colored hold including white) are selected as a hold at the time of winning a prize. And a table defined for each variation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU refers to the table, selects the gacha coin hold display or the normal hold display, and changes the hold by referring to the gacha coin hold color correspondence table or the hold color determination table according to the selected display mode. Determine the pattern.

  The expectation of jackpot when the gacha coin hold display is selected is generally higher than the expectation of the jackpot when the normal hold display is selected, but the gacha coin hold with the lowest expectation of the jackpot (gacha It is assumed that the highest degree of holding (red) that can be selected even when the deviation of the normal holding display is changed is higher than that of one coin).

  FIG. 256 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the gacha coin hold notice effect. (A) is a state where there is no change hold and the change is performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 in a state where the change is performed. In (B), referring to the gacha coin hold determination table of FIG. 252 (B), the hold display at the time of winning is determined as “1 gacha coin”, and the hold display at the start of variation is determined as “3 gacha coins”. FIG. 26 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color in FIG. 255.

  (C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has ended. (D) is a state in which a change corresponding to the hold changed to the gacha coin has started. At the start of the change, the hold display that was “1 gacha coin” has changed to “3 gacha coins”. (E) is a state in which three gacha coins are used to execute the gacha gacha effect three times. The gacha coin reserved color correspondence table is referred to, and the reserved color having the highest expectation level for jackpot is determined to be green. Therefore, in (E), the one with the highest expectation level of the big hit is green among the three on-hold displays acquired by the gacha-gacha production.

  (F) is a continuation of the change. The hold display corresponding to the change changes to green having the highest expectation level of the big hit among the three hold displays acquired by the gacha-gacha production. (G) is a state that has developed to reach in the fluctuation. In (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state that has developed into SP reach in the fluctuation. In (H), the hold remains green. (I) shows a state in which the second half of the SP reach has started in this change. At the beginning of the second half of SP reach, the hold turned red.

  Since the change mode of the hold display after the gacha coin hold notice changes to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white) is the same as the case where the gacha coin hold notice is not passed, (G), (H ) And (I) are the same as FIGS. 251 (E), (F), and (G), respectively. In addition to this, for example, the three on-hold displays acquired by the gacha-gacha production are “blue”, “green”, and “red”, and the red display is made from the state of FIG. 256 (F), and FIG. 256 (G) The timing at which the color is promoted, such as showing the final color prior to the start of reach shown in FIG.

[16. Reach collapse pseudo-ream production]
Hereinafter, the reach collapse pseudo-continuous production will be described. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect of executing the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol multiple times during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. . “Ending the decoration symbol variation” means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player recognizes the variation of the decoration symbol once, and the decoration symbol For example, there is a mode in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (a symbol in which the pseudo-continuous is fixed if this symbol stops) stops. Note that a pseudo continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is referred to as N consecutive pseudo continuous effects. The following natural number) is called the Mth quasi-continuous production.

  In addition, during a single change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the player may actually perform the operation again, while actually performing the operation again. An effect that is not performed is called a “pseudo-gase effect”. In addition, there are two pseudo continuous effects, but there is also a pseudo gasse effect that suggests execution of the third pseudo continuous effect but does not execute the third pseudo continuous effect. Hereinafter, the pseudo continuous effect is also simply referred to as “pseudo continuous effect” or “pseudo continuous effect”.

  The pseudo-continuous effect occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. When it is determined to do so, the peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo continuous symbol in at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as “continue!” As a quasi-continuous symbol in the medium decoration symbol. Note that, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even numbers and no reach) may be used as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  In each variation, the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo-series and the number of pseudo-series when the pseudo-series is executed are defined in the variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern selection rate in the variation pattern table is determined so that the big hit expectation improves as the number of pseudo-continuations increases.

  FIG. 257 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of reach collapse pseudo-continuous production. FIG. 257 (A) shows a state where fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative design is stopped, and the right decorative design is the same as the left decorative design, for example, it is stopped in a manner that it is shaking (becoming a reach state). In (C), the decorative design maintains the state of (B), and an image that prompts the user to press the center pressing operation portion 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (D) is a state immediately after the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (C). The decorative design that has reached the reach state starts to change again, and a display (“× 2!”) Indicating that the second pseudo-run has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative symbol is stopped again, and the right decorative symbol is stopped in the same manner as the left decorative symbol, for example, in a swinging manner. In addition, a display (“× 2”) indicating that the second pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative design maintains the state of (E), and an image that prompts the user to press the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and the fourth pseudo-ream is performed. In (G), the decorative design maintains the state of (E), and an image that prompts the user to press the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display (“× 4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  (H) is a state where the reach is formed without breaking the decorative design that is about to reach the reach state although the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (G). The reach state is formed with an even number of decorative designs. In addition, it is assumed that the expected value of the ball that is obtained with the jackpot is large in the order of the even numbered pattern, the odd numbered pattern other than 7 and the 7th aligned pattern. A display (“× 4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-run is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, although it has been described that it is becoming reach (upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative symbols are slightly different), from the state of reach (upper and lower positions of the left and right decorative symbols are the same), FIG. As shown in (c), an image that prompts the user to press the center pressing operation unit 303a may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 258 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the reach symbol promotion effect executed following the reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect. The reach design promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 258 (I) shows a state in which the reach symbol promotion effect has started. A character “Let's promote the reach design !!” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach design promotion effect, for example, even reach is promoted to odd reach or 7 reach, or odd reach is promoted to 7 reach. Here, it is advantageous (for example, easy to hit big hits) in the order of even reach <odd reach <7 reach. In particular, this 7-reach will be a very intense production (for example, a big hit expectation of over 80%). Note that in (I), the reach collapse effect has ended, and thus the display indicating the number of pseudo-continuations has been deleted from the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that a white effect image is displayed on the background of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. In (J), for example, it is displayed in such a manner that the decorative symbols in the reach are shaking.

  (K) is a state in which the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (J) and the reach design is successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion !!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative design has been promoted to an odd reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image changes from white to blue.

  For example, the color of the effect image of the reach design promotion effect background is white for even reach, blue for odd reach other than 7, and red for 7 reach. Even if the reach symbol promotion fails, a reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) by the reach symbol is performed, the winning is announced, and the symbol is fixed.

  Subsequently, in (L), the characters “Let's promote the reach symbol!” Are displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At this time, for example, the display is displayed in such a manner that the decorative symbols in the reach are shaking.

  (N) is a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol has been successfully promoted. A display indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted (“promotion !!!!”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative design has been promoted to 7 reach. In addition, the color of the background effect image changes from blue to red. Although illustration is omitted, after that, a reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) by 7 symbols is performed, the winning is announced, and the symbol is fixed.

  It should be noted that the first reach period in which the reach collapse pseudo-ream effect, which is the effect of the same aspect (reach pattern aspect), is repeatedly performed, and the final reach design is determined (from the end of the first period) Comparing the second period until the last), it is desirable that the second period is longer. Since the player pays the most attention to the winning result of the fluctuation to the last, the longer the second period in which the winning result is notified more directly can maintain the player's interest, and the above-mentioned 7 Since the jackpot expectation of reach is set to an exceptional value, the player who is longer in the second period than in the first period can provide the player with a sense of excitement for a long time.

  In addition, it is desirable that the number of times the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the first period is greater than the number of times the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the second period. The longer the time from the start of the change to the prompt for the operation of the operation unit, the more the player tends to think that when the operation of the operation unit is prompted, the result of the change is announced by the operation . Therefore, in the second period in which the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation is long, if the number of times the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged is large, the player will be ready for each operation and may feel tired. The number of times is as described above.

  Moreover, it is desirable that the time interval between effects that prompt the center pressing operation unit 303a to be repeatedly performed in the first period is shorter than the time interval between effects that prompt the center pressing operation unit 303a to be repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, an effect that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to press is also referred to as an operation request effect. As described above, since the second period is an effect that more directly notifies the winning result than the first period, if it takes time between the operation request effects in the first period, the player's interest It is because it cannot be maintained. In addition, the time interval between the effects of prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a to be repeatedly performed in the first period displays an effect of prompting the first central pressing operation unit 303a in the second period after the first period ends. For the same reason, the time interval is shorter than the time interval.

  Moreover, it is desirable that the operation effective period in one operation request effect in the second period is longer than the operation effective period in one operation request effect in the first period. This is because there is a player who wants to perform the pressing operation of the second period slowly with a sense of tension because the second period is more direct than the first period to notify the winning result more directly.

  Depending on the contents of the reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect (for example, the number of pseudo-continuous times is a predetermined number (for example, 3 times or less)), the operation request effect may not be executed even when SP reach is subsequently developed. However, it is desirable that the rate at which the operation request effect is executed with the SP reach is higher than the rate at which the operation request effect is not executed with the SP reach that has been developed after the reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of excitement to the player due to the occurrence of reach collapse pseudo-continuous production.

  As described above, in the example of FIGS. 257 and 258, the operation request effect display mode in the first period is one type, but the operation request effect display mode in the second period is plural types (with a blue effect). Display, and display with red effect).

  In addition, after the operation request effect starts, a timer (may be a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation effective period may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect in the first period until the timer is displayed is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect in the second period until the timer is displayed.

  Moreover, although not shown in figure, when the center press operation part 303a is pressed in the operation request | requirement effect in a 2nd period, a predetermined movable body may operate | move according to a winning result. Specifically, for example, if the big hit fluctuation, the movable body operates, and if the deviation fluctuation, the movable body does not operate. On the other hand, when the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the winning result.

  In addition, the movable body may operate even when the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, but the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. This is different from the operation mode of the movable body in the case (for example, the operation direction and the operation amount of the movable body are different, or the movable body to be operated is different).

  Further, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and the pseudo-ream starts. There may be a plurality of such specific effects. Further, depending on the type of a specific effect, it may appear such that the expectation degree of the big hit of the change is increased and the next reach collapse is determined.

  In addition, when a specific effect with high expectation appears, it is desirable that the expectation does not drop in the specific effect of transition (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, blue No cut-in effects appear). In the first period, the predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and the pseudo-ream starts. Note that the operation of the movable body may be the same every time, or the action and the acting object itself may be different depending on the current number of pseudo-continuations.

  In addition, although a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, the time interval between operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between operation request effects may be shortened after a predetermined number of times. May be. However, for example, the time interval between the last operation request effect and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between other operation request effects.

[17. Amazing stage production]
Hereinafter, the production during the stage will be described. The sugoroku stage is an example of a specific performance state, and the game is progressed while the performance is performed during the fluctuation. Specifically, an amazing map is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates during the fluctuation, and when the rotation stops, the number indicated by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 indicates, The character drawn on the amazing map goes ahead. The effect indicated by the square where the character has stopped is executed in the fluctuation or the pending fluctuation.

  It should be noted that the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is not necessarily performed in all variations. In the variation in which the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is not performed, for example, the character does not move the square, that is, stays in the same square. As a trigger for starting the stage, it is possible to move to the stage with a predetermined probability at the start of the change, or even if it is determined to stay on the stage after a predetermined number of changes after the end of the advantageous gaming state Alternatively, the transition may be made as a part of the pre-reading effect using the above-described prior determination command.

  FIG. 259 and FIG. 260 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of effects on the stage. (A) is a state immediately before a change starts. A large decorative symbol stops at the center of the effect display device 1600. Also, nothing is displayed in the amazing squares. Also, it is assumed that there are three pending changes at the time of (A). (B) is a state where the fluctuation has started. A large decorative design starts to change in the center of the effect display device 1600.

  In (C), the large decorative symbol at the center of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the small decorative symbol fluctuates in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600. In addition, at the timing when a large decorative design is erased, a display indicating the content of the effect is displayed on the grid. Further, for example, at the timing, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts to rotate. In addition, you may start rotation of the back lower inside rotation decoration body 3310 at the timing of (B).

  In (D), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating. The number of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located at the top indicates the number of squares that the character advances. In (D), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 indicates “2”.

  In (E), the character moves 2 squares. The “x” in the square that has moved two squares indicates that no special performance is performed. Therefore, a special effect is not performed and the decorative design is stopped in (F). When the decorative symbol is stopped, a large decorative symbol is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600.

  In (G), in the effect display device 1600, the camera that captures the stage moves so that the character is positioned at the last cell among the excellent cells displayed on the effect display device 1600. Perform the production. At the end of (G), it is the same as (A). Subsequently, the next fluctuation starts in (H). The details of (H) are the same as (B). Thereafter, the same effect is repeated.

  (I) is a state in which the final stage change is being executed, and details are the same as (C). (J) is a state following the final fluctuation. In (J), the ascending operation (an operation different from the rotation operation) is performed so as to approach the hold display area (hold display area for the change) in the effect display device 1600 while the back / under rotation rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated. To do. Note that the ascending operation can be executed only in the final variation. When the ascending operation is performed, the contents of the squares change to those with a high expectation degree of jackpot. The contents of the squares that are “x”, “?”, And “x” in the state (I) are all changed to “reach” in the state (J).

  It should be noted that the probability that the ascending operation is performed is higher when the final variation is a big hit variation than when the final variation is an outlier variation, that is, the final variation when the ascending operation is performed. It is desirable that the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than the expected degree of jackpot when the ascending operation is not performed. In addition, as shown in (K), the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 may hide part or all of the reserved display area, or may not hide what is close to the reserved display area.

  Further, the ascending operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the ascending operation is slower than the start of the rotating operation in the final fluctuation. As described above, when the ascending operation is performed, the big hit expectation is increased, and the player can have a sense of expectation that the ascending operation is performed even after the rotation operation is started.

  (K) is a state following the final fluctuation. In (K), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. It should be noted that the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 may return to the initial value after stopping the rotation. In (K), the hold in the hold display area that has been hidden is changed from a normal display to a blue hold display (a hold display having a higher probability of hitting than a normal hold display).

  Note that the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be executed even in a change in the production state other than the stage, but it is more amazing than the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous changes in the stage. It is desirable that the probability that the rotational operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations in the production state other than the stage is set to be lower. This is because the player can enjoy the extravagance if there are more fluctuations in which the character advances in the square on the extravagant stage.

  On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of consecutive fluctuations is set higher than the stage. This is because there is an effect state in which the under-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 which seems to be provided for the stage at first glance is continuously rotated, so that a surprise feeling can be provided to the player.

  In addition, although an example in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated has been described, an operation that changes the position may be performed instead of an operation that does not change the position as in the rotating operation. For example, the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be slightly elevated while being rotated (an increase width smaller than the upward movement in the final variation).

[18. Specific zone production]
Hereinafter, the production of the specific zone will be described. Examples of the specific zone include a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone is, for example, a zone that enters the last stage of the previous chapter. Moreover, the super pine zone is a zone that may enter regardless of the stage, for example.

  For example, the entry into these specific zones is executed as a pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect is an effect that executes an effect that suggests a winning result of a pending change from the start of the pending change. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command for the reserved special symbol variation transmitted from the main control MPU, and each of the suspended special symbol variations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation). ) (Pre-reading determination), and pre-reading effects can be executed based on the determination result.

  After entering the pine zone and the super pine zone, the rush state of these zones continues until the change corresponding to the hold determined to be prefetched (also referred to as prefetch target change). It is assumed that the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold determined in the pine zone and the super pine zone is high. Further, it is assumed that the big hit expectation degree of the prefetch target change is higher in the case of entering the super pine zone than in the case of entering the pine zone. In addition, it is desirable that the pine zone and the super pine zone in which the newly held change is the pre-reading target change in the state where the big hit change is being executed or held are not executed.

  261 and 262 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a pine zone effect. (A) is a state in which fluctuations during the stage are being executed. The second pending variation of the variation being executed in (A) is the prefetch target variation. A pre-reading effect for the pre-reading target change is performed from the change of (A). In (A), an effect is performed in which the character stops at the square marked “pine zone”. (B) is a continuation of the variation of (A). A display indicating that the pine zone has been entered is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In (C), a decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone (“in the pine zone...”) Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the change has ended. In the next variation of (C), for example, the same effects as in (C) and (D) are executed.

  (E) is a state in which the prefetch target variation has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state where reach is established in the prefetch target variation. In the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

  When a specific performance with a high expectation level for jackpots is being executed, such as when the reach is established, the display indicating that you are staying in the pine zone is erased, so you stay in the pine zone until then. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific performance is being executed to a player who has paid much attention to being inside. Moreover, if it is always displayed that the user is staying in the pine zone, there is a possibility that the player's tension will continue to be tired. Note that the timing at which the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be deleted a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time when execution of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  In other words, before the start of SP reach production (Janken game production to be described later), a specific timing (when reach is reached, when a display that confirms the pseudo-run appears, when reach or pseudo-run occurs. The display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone may be temporarily deleted.

  In (G), the state where the reach is applied is continued. In (G), a display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. (G) is the timing at which the player is waiting for whether or not it will develop into SP reach. At that timing, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone with a high expectation level for jackpots is redisplayed. Recalling that it is in the pine zone, we can expect the development of SP reach.

  (H) is a state in which the Janken game production which is SP reach has started. The Janken game directing is an SP reach that develops due to changes in the look-ahead target in the pine zone and the super pine zone. The Janken game effect is, for example, an effect that has an extremely high expectation level in the SP reach effect (for example, an expectation level that is high next to the SP reach effect that is selected only when the hit effect changes). Note that even if you enter the pine zone, the Janken game effect is not necessarily executed. It is assumed that

  At the start of the Janken game production, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased from the production display device 1600, and the display is erased even during the Janken game production. The Janken game production is a production with a very high expectation level for jackpots, and draws the player's attention to the Janken game production. For this reason, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set higher at the start of the Janken game production than when the pine zone is entered.

  (I) is a continuation of the Janken game production. Janken shout is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (J), there is a Janken game directed by Janken. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), the effect display device 1600 displays a state in which the teammate character has won the enemy game against the enemy character (that is, it is informed that the change is a big hit change). At (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are stopped in the jackpot combination.

  FIG. 263 and FIG. 264 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the super pine zone effect. The entry into the super pine zone is executed as a hold notice effect, for example. Specifically, for example, the display is displayed in a manner indicating that the hold is likely to enter the super pine zone (hereinafter also referred to as a super pine suggestion hold). In addition, a display of a mode indicating that the entry to the super pine zone is confirmed (hereinafter also referred to as a super pine confirmation hold), for example, a hold corresponding to the winning at the time of winning is displayed as a super pine suggestion hold, It changes to super pine suggestion hold at the timing when the normal display mode hold moves.

  (A) is a state in which fluctuations are being executed and three fluctuations are suspended. (B) is the state of (A), in which the fluctuation is newly suspended. In (B), when the winning of the new hold is the super matsu suggestion hold (the hold indicated as “super pine?”. If it is the super pine confirmed hold, it will be indicated as “super pine!” And may be displayed in a color (for example, red) different from the standard color (for example, white)). The super pine suggestion hold is the hold of the pre-reading target change. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation has been completed.

  (D) is a state in which the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuation of the variation of (D). In (E), in the effect display device 1600, a speech effect ("super pine zone may ...") suggesting entry into the super pine zone is executed. (F) is the state at the end of the change. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (“...”) Indicating that entry into the super pine zone was suggested but entry into the super pine zone was not possible.

  (G) is a state after the next fluctuation of (F) is started. One super pine suggestion move has moved. Also, in (G), a line production (“really super pine zone !!!!”) suggesting entry into the super pine zone is displayed again. The serif effect in (G) is an effect that has a higher expected entry into the super pine zone than the serif effect in (E). As described above, when an effect suggesting a plurality of times of entry into the super pine zone is executed, it is desirable that the expected entry into the super pine zone is not lowered in the plurality of times of the effect.

  In (H), a display confirming that the vehicle enters the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As shown in (H), the super pine suggestion suspension may change to the super pine confirmation suspension at this timing. In the example of FIG. 263, the super pine suggestion hold is changed to the super pine confirmation hold at the timing when the display confirming the entry into the super pine zone appears. Needless to say, may appear. In the example of FIG. 263, the entry into the super pine zone from the entry suggestion effect into the super pine zone is performed over two fluctuations, but may be performed with one fluctuation.

  In (I), a decorative symbol is displayed in the center, and a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the super pine confirmation hold is changed to a hold display having a high degree of expectation (red hold display in (I)). For example, fluctuations are digested in this state.

  (J) is a state where the prefetch target variation has started. (K) is a state in which reach is established in the prefetch target variation. Similar to the pine zone, when the reach is established, the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

  When a specific performance with a high jackpot expectation level, such as the timing when reach is established, is executed, the indication indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased, so that the user stays in the super pine zone. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific performance is being executed to a player who has paid much attention to being inside. Further, if the fact that it is the super pine zone is always displayed, there is a possibility that the player's tension will continue to be tired. In addition, the timing at which the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone may be deleted a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be erased every time when execution of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  That is, similar to the above-mentioned pine zone, before the SP reach production (the above-mentioned Janken game production) is started, at a specific timing (when reach is reached, when a display that confirms the pseudo-ream appears, The display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone may be erased once in the case of performing (emphasized) production related to the occurrence of reach or pseudo-ream).

  In (L), the reach state is continued. In (L), similarly to the pine zone, a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. Since the super pine zone has a higher expectation degree of jackpot compared to the pine zone, the player can obtain a sense of exhilaration again by displaying the stay in the super pine zone again.

  (M) is a state in which the Janken game production which is SP reach has started. As mentioned above, when you enter the super pine zone, the Janken game performance is always executed. In (M), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased again from the effect display device 1600. Thereby, it can appeal to a player strongly that it has entered the Janken game production.

  (N) is a continuation of the Janken game production. Janken shout is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has a higher expectation level than the pine zone. Therefore, the display is performed at the timing when the Janken game is actually being performed in the Janken game production, so that the player can enhance the synergy between the two Janken game production and the super-matsu zone. A feeling can be obtained.

  In (O), there is a Janken game of Janken game production. The hand of the teammate character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), the effect display device 1600 displays a state where the teammate character has won the enemy game against the enemy character (that is, it is notified that the variation is a big hit variation).

  In (O), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600. This is because at the timing when the winning result of the change is already notified, only the winning result is important for the player, and it is not important whether or not the player stays in the super pine zone. In (P), it is notified in the effect display device 1600 that the jackpot is won, and the decorative symbols are stopped in the combination of jackpots.

  In addition, the example where the super pine zone starts after the super pine suggestion suspension has been described has been explained. Even during the corresponding fluctuation, although the entry of the super pine zone is suggested, an effect that fails to enter is performed.

  In addition, in the example described above, special effects were not performed for changes that were not pre-reading changes while staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone, but specific effects (for example, the start of the Janken game effect) May be executed. Further, the entry into the pine zone and the super pine zone may be performed with a normal effect (a part of the effect performed within one change) that is not a look-ahead effect. Specifically, for example, the entry suggestion effect, the entry effect, and the Janken game for the pine zone or the super pine zone may be executed by a single change.

  In principle, the entry to the pine zone is performed by the character stopping at the grid indicating the pine zone of the stage, so that the pine zone may not be indicated by the hold display like the super pine zone. desirable. If the pine zone is suggested by the hold display at the Sugoroku stage, the contents of the squares that are not displayed until after the start of the change are suggested by the hold display, and there is a possibility that the enjoyment as the Sugoroku will decrease. Because there is.

  In the above-described pine zone and super pine zone, for example, when the reach has occurred, an example of deleting the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone has been described. An image (for example, a reach emphasis effect) different from the display image may be displayed so as to overlap the higher priority side. In short, the display indicating that you are staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone is not recognized by the player (or it is displayed in layers, but you are staying in the pine zone or the super pine zone very slightly. Can be seen).

[19. Hold peeping effect]
Hereinafter, the holding peeping effect that is an example of the holding notice effect will be described. FIG. 265 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a holding look effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is being executed. Three variations are reserved in (A). In (B), a character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and one of the hold display areas is hidden without hiding the hold display (the hold display located at the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the currently running variation. Part (partly means to completely hide a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four holdings, and / or to hide a part for each of the four holdings (that is, to fully hold all four holdings) Is hidden). The character may hide the entire hold display area. Moreover, you may hide the holding | maintenance display (holding display located in the lower center of the production | presentation display apparatus 1600) corresponding to the fluctuation | variation currently being performed by the said character.

  In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display (the third hold in FIG. 265) hidden by the character is changed to a hold display in green with a high expectation. It has changed. (D) is the end of the change. The decorative symbol is stopped by a combination indicating that the variation is a deviation variation. As in the example of FIG. 265, in the case of hiding only the on-hold hold display, it is desirable that the hold-peep effect is executed only when the change being executed is a deviation change.

  In the case where a normal peeking effect is executed in a variation in which a normal deviation variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special effect such as a reach effect is not executed is selected) has a long change time (for example, about 10 seconds). As shown in the example of FIG. 265, the character does not appear at the start of change, and appears after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of change. In the case of a shortened variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a special effect such as a reach effect is not executed, a change time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds)), A character may appear after a very short time (a time shorter than the above-described 3 seconds) from the start of the change (for example, after 0.5 seconds).

  Further, before (B), a turn-off effect of the holding peeping effect may be performed. Specifically, for example, a character appears on the effect display device 1600 and approaches the reserved display area but does not hide the reserved display area. In addition, although the roaring effect is performed, an effect in which the character disappears without concealing the holding display area may be performed. In the above-described shortened variation pattern, since the variation time is short, it is desirable not to perform the roaring effect or to perform in a short time (for example, about 1 second). Further, when such a roaring effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may be changed without fail.

  In the example of FIG. 265, a part of the hold display hidden by the character has changed, but there may be a pattern in which all the hold display changes, or there is a pattern in which all the hold display does not change. May be.

  In addition, even if it is a hold display of a color having the same jackpot expectation level, for example, the case of passing the hold look effect is higher than the case of not passing the hold look effect, To do. Thereby, when the holding peeping effect is executed, the player can obtain a sense of exaltation. On the contrary, even if it is a color hold display with the same big hit expectation level, the big hit expectation level may be higher when the hold peep effect is not passed than when the hold peep effect is passed . The player's expectation in a high-probability or always-on-hold display that has a high probability of hitting, but with a low probability of jackpot expectation, and a normal hold color change effect that cannot be predicted but has a high expectation of jackpot You can balance the feeling.

  Further, as in the example of FIG. 265, in the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to notify that the hold display is changed when the character has withdrawn from the hold display. If there is a change in the reserved color or suggests a reserved color after the change before the character evacuates, the period during which the player feels tense in the reserved peeping effect is shortened and the interest is reduced. Because.

  However, for example, a light emitter different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED attached to the front wall portion 2101 of the start port unit 2100, or a lamp or LED provided in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100). Is emitted in a color equivalent to the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, before the character is retracted in the effect display device 1600 (that is, before display of the changed reserved color). May be emitted with the reserved color. A player usually plays a game while mainly watching the effect display device 1600, but can feel a sense of expectation by feeling a slight change due to a change in the color of the luminous body that has entered the field of view. .

  Since the purpose is to allow the player to recognize the change in the color of the illuminant prior to the change in the reserved color of the effect display device 1600, the effect (control) for changing the reserved color in the effect display device 1600 is performed. Even if the timing of execution is before the timing of executing the effect of changing the color of the illuminant, or even at the same timing, the player is notified by the change of the color of the illuminant before the change of the reserved color of the effect display device 1600. There is no problem if it can be recognized.

  In addition, the light emitter may be caused to emit light with a reserved color (for example, white) in a normal display mode immediately before the light emitter is caused to emit light or immediately before the light emission color of the light emitter is changed. Specifically, for example, when the hold color of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the light emitter is changed from blue to white before the change of the hold color of the effect display device 1600. Further, the color changes from white to green. In addition, although the example in which the reserved color of the normal display mode is white has been described, there is no problem as long as the color is not limited to white and may not be selected as the reserved color after promotion in this reserved change effect. Further, when performing white display, there is no problem whether it is lit or flashing. If it is lit, the liquid crystal can be watched, and if it is blinking, it can be shown that a pending change is being made.

  In such a case, it is desirable that the time during which the luminescent color of the light emitter emits white light is extremely short (for example, shorter than the shortest variation pattern among all the variation patterns). This is because if the light emitting body emits white light for a long time, the player may misunderstand the player if the hold display changes to a white color with a low expectation level of jackpot.

  In addition, when the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a special mode hold that cannot be expressed only by color (for example, super pine suggestion hold as described above), the light emitter is, for example, in the effect display device 1600. Light emission in a color that is not used in the reserved color change (for example, when the white, blue, green, red, or iridescent reserved color change can be performed in the effect display device 1600, the light emitter emits purple light) Alternatively, the hold display mode is expressed by executing light emission of a predetermined pattern. Examples of the predetermined pattern of light emission include a pattern in which red blinks and a pattern in which light is emitted alternately in red and green.

  In the example of FIG. 265, a series of effects in which the character hides the hold display and retreats is performed only once, but the effects may be executed a plurality of times. When the production is executed a plurality of times, the mode of the hold display may change every time, the mode of the hold display may change at least once, and the mode of the hold display does not change even once. Also good.

  Further, it is desirable that the holding look effect is performed only for the holding shown in FIG. When the game is progressing mainly due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2, for example, a very short fluctuation time is often selected, such as a short time state, so it is necessary to execute the holding peep effect at high speed. This is because the player may be confused.

  In addition, a plurality of types of characters may exist in the holding peep effect. The degree of expectation of each of the plurality of characters may be different, or the degree of expectation may be common to some or all characters. This expectation degree may be a hold change expectation degree in the hold peeping effect, or may be a jackpot expectation degree in the hold fluctuation. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the hold expectation increases in the order of character A, character B, and character C, and character C is selected only when a hold change is executed. In addition, for example, character B has a higher expected change in hold than character A, but the expectation of jackpot in the case of a change in hold may be higher in character A than in character B. Character A and character B may have the same hold change expectation and jackpot expectation, and character C may set a hold change expectation and jackpot expectation higher than those of character A and character B.

  It should be noted that it is desirable that the pending look effect be performed only when the fluctuation during execution is out of place, but the fluctuation during execution is non-reach fluctuation or reach fluctuation that does not have a high expectation degree of big hit (for example, normal reach is off It is further desirable that the reserved look effect is performed only in the case of fluctuations). In other words, it is desirable that the pending look effect does not occur not only when the fluctuation being executed is a big hit fluctuation but also when the reach effect with a high expectation degree of big hit such as SP reach is executed.

  If a hold peeping effect occurs during the fluctuation in which the SP reach is executed, the player thinks that the fluctuation being held has a higher expectation than the fluctuation currently being executed. This is because the sense of expectation for reach may be diminished.

[20. Multiple cycle production]
Hereinafter, an effect in which a plurality of cycle effects are executed simultaneously will be described. A cycle effect is a periodic effect in which a predetermined effect is executed in one cycle, and the predetermined effect of the one cycle is executed continuously a plurality of times (however, the cycle effect may end in the middle of the cycle). It is. Note that the cycle effect may end during the cycle.

[20-1. Reservation cycle production and decorative design cycle production]
FIG. 266 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIG. 266, the reserved cycle effect repeats the effect of four frames as one cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of six frames as one cycle. That is, one cycle in the decorative symbol cycle effect is longer than one cycle in the reserved cycle effect.

  Note that the length of one frame can be defined by the number of frames in the effect display device 1600, for example. Moreover, the length of one frame may differ for every production. That is, as the number of frames in one cycle is larger, the time for one cycle is not necessarily longer. Specifically, for example, when one frame is 5 frames and one cycle consists of 4 frames, the length of one cycle is 20 frames, but one frame is 3 frames and one cycle is 6 frames. In the case of frames, the length of one cycle is 18 frames.

  However, in the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the length of one frame is the same in all effects. Specifically, a predetermined number of frames (for example, 10 frames) in the effect display device 1600 is called one frame. That is, in the following, it is assumed that the time for one cycle is longer as the number of frames in one cycle is larger.

  In the example of FIG. 266, there is a holding display area from the lower center of the effect display device 1600 to the lower left. A pedestal is displayed in the hold display area, and each hold display is displayed on the upper or lower portion of the pedestal. Each hold display is, in order from the center to the left, a change being executed, a change next to the change being executed and a change being held (also called a hold 1 change), and a change following the hold 1 change. Fluctuations (also referred to as “Two” fluctuations), fluctuations subsequent to Pending 2 fluctuations and pending changes (also referred to as “Principal 3 fluctuations”), fluctuations following Pending 3 fluctuations that are pending (Pending 4) (Also referred to as fluctuation)). In the state where the hold cycle effect is not executed, each hold display is displayed on the pedestal as shown in (A) (display that is slightly lifted from the pedestal as shown in (A)). It may be).

  The hold display in each frame of the hold cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, as shown in (B), each hold display is displayed on the pedestal (the same state as (A) where the hold cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as shown in (C), each hold display is displayed below compared to the state of the first frame. Specifically, for example, a part of each hold display overlaps the pedestal. In the third frame, as shown in (D), the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the first frame. In the fourth frame, as shown in (E), each hold display is displayed above the pedestal (at a higher position than the first and third frames). When the fourth frame effect ends, the process returns to the first frame effect as shown in (F).

  By executing the hold cycle effect, it is possible to avoid the hold display from being completely blended with the background, so that the player can easily see the hold display, and overlooks the hold when there is a hold. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the hold display based on a new winning is performed while the hold cycle effect is being executed, for example, the hold display may be performed in synchronization with the hold cycle effect being executed. desirable. That is, when the hold display is performed on the third frame of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect in the hold display starts from the third frame, so that the hold display effects in all the hold displays are synchronized. Thereby, even if a new hold display is made during the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

  Note that the hold display effect in the hold display corresponding to the hold display may be started from a predetermined number of frames (for example, from the first frame) regardless of the frame of the hold cycle effect being executed. As a result, there is a possibility that the hold display where the hold cycle effect has already been executed and the hold display newly acquired during the hold cycle effect can be distinguished and visually recognized. The player can get a sense of exaltation. In the example of FIG. 266, in the hold cycle effect, an effect in which the hold display moves up and down the pedestal is executed. For example, an effect in which the hold display rotates (the hold display coordinate value is the same as the hold display). A cycle effect) or an effect in which the effect of the hold display changes may be executed.

  Next, the decorative design will be described. In the example of FIG. 266, each decorative design includes a number and a character (corresponding to the number) displayed behind the number. In a state in which the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed, the characters in each decorative symbol are upright as shown in (B).

  The display of the decorative symbol in each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, as shown in (B), the characters in each decorative symbol stand upright (the same state as (A) where the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as in (C), the characters in each decorative pattern are punched in the right direction. In the third frame, as in (D), the characters in each decorative pattern are punched in the left direction. In the fourth frame, the character in each decorative design kicks in the right direction as shown in (E). In the fifth frame, the character in each decorative symbol kicks in the left direction as shown in (F). In the sixth frame, the character in each decorative design kicks upward as shown in (G). When the effect for the sixth frame ends, the effect returns to the effect for the first frame as shown in (H).

  By executing the decorative symbol cycle effect, it is possible to avoid the decorative symbol from completely blending into the background, so that the player can easily see the decorative symbol, and overlooks the combination of the decorative symbols that have stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

  In the example of FIG. 266, in the decorative symbol cycle effect, there is no change in the numbers included in each decorative symbol, but a change effect of one cycle may also be performed for the numbers. Note that the cyclic fluctuation of the decorative symbol is also an example of the decorative symbol cycle effect.

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. Even in the period from the start of the fluctuation (A) to when reach is reached, the hold cycle effect is executed in principle. This is to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the hold display. Note that the hold cycle effect may not be executed during the period. Temporarily, in the period, when the ratio of execution of the high expectation effect using the hold display such as the hold change effect is set low, the hold display is made easier to visually recognize the hold display by performing the hold cycle effect. This is because the player cannot be given an uplifting feeling.

  From (B), a reserved cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (B), the first frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In addition, when the hold cycle effect is performed even in the state of (A), the start timings of the two cycle effects may be aligned at the start of the decorative symbol cycle effect. Specifically, for example, in the frame immediately before (B), even if the second frame of the hold cycle effect is being executed, the first frame of the hold cycle effect at the start of (B). You may migrate.

  In (C), the second-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (D), the third-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (E), the fourth frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  In (F), the reserved cycle effect is returned to the first frame, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the fifth frame effect. In (G), the second frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the sixth frame effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the third frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect returns to the first frame.

  (I) is a state developed into SP reach. When the SP reach is started, the decorative symbol is displayed in a small state in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is completed. In addition, the holding cycle effect continues even after the SP reach has started.

  During the period before the SP reach is executed, the player's feelings have not yet increased, but there is still a high possibility that the hold change effect will be executed. By this, it is possible to make the player actively notice that there is a hold. In addition, in the period before the SP reach is executed, the player's attention to the decorative symbol is increased, so that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the reach effect is executed.

  Therefore, in the period before the SP reach is executed, the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed simultaneously, so that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the reach effect is executed, while the change in hold You can also pay attention to the production.

  Further, as described above, in the example of FIG. 266, the decorative symbol cycle effect has one cycle longer than the reserved cycle effect. The shorter the cycle, the easier the display looks like a still image. On the other hand, the longer the one cycle, the easier it is to see the display as a moving image. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 266, in the state where the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, the decorative symbol has higher visibility than the reserved display. As a result, in the period before the SP reach execution, there is a possibility that a hold change effect with a high degree of expectation may be executed, but the decorative pattern showing the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is more important. A sense of uplifting can be given to the person.

  FIG. 267 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, as in FIG. 266. In the example of FIG. 267, the hold cycle effect has one frame of 6 frames. This is a cycle effect, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is different from FIG. 266 in that it is an effect in which four frames are one cycle. That is, in the example of FIG. 267, one cycle in the decorative symbol cycle effect is shorter than one cycle in the hold cycle effect. In the example of FIG. 267, similarly to FIG. 266, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before the start of the SP reach.

  The hold display in each frame of the hold cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, as shown in (B), each hold display is displayed on the pedestal (the same state as (A) where the hold cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as shown in (C), each hold display is displayed below compared to the state of the first frame. Specifically, for example, a part of each hold display overlaps the pedestal. In the third frame, as shown in (D), each hold display is further displayed below the state of the second frame, and specifically, for example, all of the hold displays overlap the pedestal.

  In the fourth frame, as shown in (E), the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the second frame. In the fifth frame, as shown in (F), the display position of each hold display returns to the same state as in the first frame. In the sixth frame, as shown in (G), each hold display is displayed above the pedestal (at a higher position than the first and fifth frames). When the effect for the sixth frame ends, the effect returns to the effect for the first frame as shown in (H).

  The display of the decorative symbol in each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is as follows. In the first frame, as shown in (B), the characters in each decorative symbol stand upright (the same state as (A) where the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed). In the second frame, as in (C), the characters in each decorative pattern are punched in the right direction. In the third frame, as in (D), the characters in each decorative pattern are punched in the left direction. In the fourth frame, the character in each decorative design kicks in the right direction as shown in (E). When the fourth frame effect ends, the process returns to the first frame effect as shown in (F).

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. From (B), a reserved cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (B), the first frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (C), the second-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (D), the third-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (E), the fourth frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  In (F), the reserved cycle effect is the fifth frame effect, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is returned to the first frame effect. In (G), the sixth frame effect of the hold cycle effect and the second effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the hold cycle effect returns to the effect of the first frame, and the third effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  (I) is a state developed into SP reach. When the SP reach is started, the decorative symbol is displayed in a small state in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol cycle effect is completed. In addition, the holding cycle effect continues even after the SP reach has started.

  In the example of FIG. 267, one cycle is longer in the reserved cycle effect than in the decorative symbol cycle effect. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 267, in the state where the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed, the hold display has higher visibility than the decorative symbol. As a result, it is possible to appeal the player to the hold display more strongly than the decorative symbols to the player. Therefore, if there is a hold, it is unclear whether an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed before SP reach. In a certain stage), it is possible to appeal to the player that there is a possibility that multiple big hits may arrive in a short time.

  In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period before the SP reach, the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same. Good (specifically, for example, one cycle of the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). Since the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be noted.

  It should be noted that the length of the period before SP reach in which the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed (from (A) to (H) in FIG. 266 and (A) to (H) in FIG. 267). The length of the period) is preferably longer than one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect, regardless of which of the plurality of change patterns that generate the SP reach. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that it is a periodic effect, and as a result, attention to the holding display and the decorative symbol can be increased. .

  In addition, the length of the period before the SP reach where the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is equal to or greater than the least common multiple of the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect. It is desirable to be. That is, in the example of FIGS. 266 and 267, the period is desirably 12 frames or more. After the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect start, the start timing of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is aligned again at the timing of the least common multiple. Therefore, when the length of the period is equal to or greater than the least common multiple, it is possible to realize one cycle effect in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are integrated (the length of one cycle is the least common multiple). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative design.

  In addition, the length of the period before SP reach in which the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed may be less than one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect.

  FIG. 268 and FIG. 269 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which a reserved cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIGS. 268 and 269, the holding cycle effect repeats the effect of 4 frames as 1 cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of 6 frames as 1 cycle. The production of each frame of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIGS. 268 and 269 is the same as the effect of each frame of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, respectively. Is omitted. The example of FIGS. 268 and 269 is different from FIG. 266 in that the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed during the SP reach execution period.

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. (C) is a continued state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. It is assumed that only the hold cycle effect is being executed until immediately before (D).

  (D) is a state where SP reach has started. It is assumed that SP reach continues until (K) described later. In (D), the first frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (E), the second-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (F), the third effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (G), the fourth frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  In (H), the hold cycle effect returns to the effect of the first frame, and the effect of the fifth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. In (I), the second frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the sixth effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the third frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect returns to the first frame effect.

  In this example, the title display indicating SP reach (display “Janken game!” Such as (D) in FIG. 268) has a display time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect, and is a decoration. Although the display time is shorter than one cycle of the symbol cycle effect, the title display indicating the SP reach may be longer than one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect, and the start of two cycles may be The display time may be longer than the period until they are aligned again (in this example, 12 frames).

  (K) is the final frame of the SP reach effect, and a judge effect in the SP reach effect (effect that directly indicates the special lottery result in the change) is performed. When the teammate character wins the enemy character in the Janken game, it is determined that the variation is a big hit variation. What is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600 is the hand of the teammate character, and what is displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. In (K), the teammate character wins. The decorative symbol cycle effect is executed until (K). (L) is a state during a judge production. In (L), the decorative symbol cycle effect is finished, but the hold cycle effect is executed. (M) is a judge production and is the next frame of (L). In (M), the on-hold cycle effect continues.

  Although the decorative symbol cycle effect is ended in (L) and (M), the decorative symbol cycle effect may be executed continuously in (L) and (M). In that case, in (M), it is desirable to display the winning symbol “4” as a middle symbol in the center of the screen. By doing so, the degree of recognition of the reach symbol by “4” displayed large in the center of the screen and the execution of the decorative symbol cycle effect is increased, and the player can clearly recognize that it has been a big hit. .

  During the SP reach execution, the player's tension is considerably increased. Therefore, by executing the hold cycle effect during the period, it becomes easier to recognize that a new change is being held. Therefore, even if the result of SP reach is off, there is a sense of expectation for a new hold. This can relieve excessive tension. In addition, during the SP reach execution period, the decorative symbol is displayed in a small form on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect during the period, the decorative symbol is in the reach state. A player can be made to recognize again.

  Therefore, during the SP reach execution period, both the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed at the same time, thereby relieving excessive tension while allowing the player to clearly recognize that the reach effect is being performed. Can be made.

  Further, as described above, in the example of FIGS. 268 and 269, one cycle is longer in the decorative symbol cycle effect than in the reserved cycle effect. Therefore, during the SP reach production, the decorative design is more strongly appealed to the player than the hold display, so that the player is more aware that the reach production is in progress (a big hit may come soon). Can appeal strongly.

  Although not shown, when the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed at the same time during the SP reach execution, the reserved cycle effect is longer by one cycle than the decorative symbol cycle effect. (Specifically, for example, one cycle of the holding cycle effect is 6 frames, and one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, during SP reach, because the hold display has higher visibility than the decorative design, appeal to the player that there is a possibility that multiple hits may arrive in a short time due to the hold. Can do. Further, since the hold display is more noticeable than the decorative design, it is possible to further alleviate the player's excessive tension.

  Although not shown, when the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed simultaneously during the SP reach execution, the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect and the reserved cycle effect is the same. (Specifically, for example, one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, since the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be noted.

  It is desirable that the length of the period during the SP reach in which the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is longer than one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that it is a periodic effect, and as a result, attention to the holding display and the decorative symbol can be increased. .

  Further, the length of the period during the SP reach in which the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is equal to or greater than the least common multiple of the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol effect. It is desirable to be. That is, in the example of FIGS. 268 and 269, the period is desirably 12 frames or more. After the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect start, the start timing of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is aligned again at the timing of the least common multiple. Therefore, when the length of the period is equal to or greater than the least common multiple, it is possible to realize one cycle effect in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are integrated (the length of one cycle is the least common multiple). It is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative design.

  Note that when the judgment effect of FIG. 269 (K) is shown (the timing at which the winning result is shown), the hold cycle effect may not be executed, or the hold display itself may not be performed in the first place.

  FIG. 270 and FIG. 271 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which a holding cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIGS. 270 and 271, the holding cycle effect repeats the effect of 4 frames as 1 cycle, and the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of 6 frames as 1 cycle. The effects of each frame of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the examples of FIGS. 270 and 271 are the same as the effects of each frame of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266, respectively. Is omitted. The example of FIGS. 270 and 271 is different from FIG. 266 in that the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period after the judge effect in the SP reach.

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. (B) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. (C) is a state where SP reach has started. (D) is a continuation of the SP reach production. (E) is a state in which a judge effect in SP reach is being executed. In (E), the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character. (F) is a continuation of (E) and is a state in which a judge effect is being executed.

  (G) is a state after the end of the judge effect in SP reach. When the judge effect ends, the decorative symbol is displayed again in a large size in the center of the effect display device 1600 (in other words, the decorative effect is displayed until the decorative symbol is displayed again in a large size). Note that only the reserved cycle effect is executed until immediately before (G), and the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed from (G).

  In (G), the first frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (H), the second frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (I), the third effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the fourth frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J) in the example of FIG. 271, the hold display moved above the pedestal overlaps with another effect image (characters “sorry ...”), and the hold display is preferentially displayed ( In the example of FIG. 271, the characters are displayed in front of the characters in other effects, but other effect images may be preferentially displayed.

  In (K), the reserved cycle effect returns to the effect of the first frame, and the effect of the fifth frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. In (L), the second frame effect of the reserved cycle effect is executed, and the sixth effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (M), the third frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect returns to the first frame effect. Note that the decorative symbol cycle effect continues, for example, until the decorative symbol completely stops at the end of the change. In addition, the hold cycle effect may end, for example, with a complete stop of the decorative symbol at the end of the change, or may continue after the end of the change.

  In the period after the end of the Judge production, if the jackpot is not announced in the Judge production, the player is in a state where the reality of being out of play has been pointed out. By noticing, the player's feelings can be reset. In addition, even if a jackpot is announced in the judge performance, the player can feel the expectation for further jackpot after the jackpot ends by notifying that there is a hold by executing the hold cycle effect during the period. Can be held in.

  Further, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect during the period, the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result after the judge effect can be more strongly appealed to the player. Therefore, in the period after the judge effect, both the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol effect are executed at the same time, so that the player can clearly recognize the special lottery result, but if the player loses the special lottery result, The discouragement can be reduced, and if the game is a big hit, the player can be provided with more expectation.

  Further, as described above, in the example of FIGS. 270 and 271, one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is longer than the reserved cycle effect. Therefore, after the judge effect, the decorative symbol is more appealing to the player than the hold display. In particular, if the special lottery result is out of order, appealing the decorative design more strongly than the hold display will make it possible for the player to be sure that the result is out of place, The occurrence of troubles can be suppressed. In order to be able to grasp the decorative symbol cycle effect on the hall side, for example, the execution time of the decorative symbol cycle effect is secured to such an extent that the decorative symbol cycle effect after the judge effect can be photographed with the surveillance camera of the hall. desirable. Specifically, for example, the time is longer than the variation pattern which is the shortest variation time throughout the gaming state.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the period after the judge effect, when the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed simultaneously, the hold cycle effect is longer than the decorative symbol cycle effect by one cycle. (For example, one cycle of the holding cycle effect is 6 frames, and one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, in the period after the judge effect, the player's attention is directed to the hold display rather than the decorative symbol, so that the disgust can be reduced for the player when the special lottery result is off.

  Although not shown, when the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period after the judge effect, the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect and the reserved cycle effect is the same. (Specifically, for example, one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is 4 frames). In this case, since the length of one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same, both the reserved display and the decorative symbol can be noted.

  It is desirable that the length of the period after the judgment effect in which the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed is longer than one cycle of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect. As a result, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed in a plurality of cycles, so that the player can recognize that it is a periodic effect, and as a result, attention to the holding display and the decorative symbol can be increased. .

  For example, when the left decorative symbol is in a swinging variation state, only one decorative symbol is displayed as the left decorative symbol and is not changed to the other decorative symbols (for example, only “1” as the left decorative symbol). Is displayed and does not change to another decorative design), the decorative design does not stop completely but is displayed in a shaking manner.

  In addition, the period before the SP reach (also referred to as the first period), the period during the SP reach (also referred to as the second period), and the period after the judge effect are the periods in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. Although an example of (also referred to as a third period) has been described, for example, it is desirable that the period is long in the order of first period ≧ second period ≧ third period.

  As described above, since the player's feelings have not yet increased during the first period, by directing the player's attention to the hold display (especially a high-priced hold change effect, etc.) and decorative designs, In order to increase the player's expectation, a long period is desirable. The second period is a state where a high expectation of SP reach is being executed, and the player's excessive tension can be relieved by directing the player's attention to the hold display and the decorative design. It is desirable that the period is shorter than the first period so as not to significantly reduce the attention to SP reach. Since the third period is after the special lottery result has been notified directly, the player has the effect described above for directing the player's attention to the on-hold display and the decorative design, but the player is not able to win the big hit game or the subsequent fluctuations. It is desirable that the period is shorter than the first period and the second period.

  In the above-described example, the example in which the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in any one of the first period, the second period, and the third period has been described. The holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect may be executed simultaneously in two or all of the period and the third period. In the case of fluctuation, even if the first period exists, it does not always shift to the second period and the third period after the end of the first period, but when it shifts to the second period after the end of the first period. May be shifted to the third period after the second period.

  It is desirable that the display size of the decorative symbols in the first period and the third period is larger than the display size of the decorative symbols in the second period. Although the high expectation performance is not performed in the first period and the third period, since the high expectation SP reach is performed in the second period, even if the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed, This is because the player's attention is directed not only to the decorative design but also to the SP reach.

  In the example of FIGS. 270 and 271, the display sizes of the decorative symbols in the first period and the third period are the same, but an effect with a higher expectation than the third period in which the special lottery result has already been notified. It is desirable that the display size of the decorative design in the first period that is likely not to occur and that may occur in the future is larger.

  FIGS. 272 and 273 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed. In the example of FIG. 272 and FIG. 273, the hold change effect is executed, and the hold cycle effect of the normal hold (the hold that has not changed) repeats the effect with 4 frames as one cycle, and the hold cycle effect after the change is , Repeat the production with 6 frames as one cycle. That is, when the hold changes, one cycle in the hold cycle effect becomes longer. In the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the decorative symbol cycle effect repeats the effect of six frames as one cycle.

  In the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the effect of each frame of the normal hold cycle effect in the normal hold is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266. The effect of the frame is the same as the effect of each frame of the reserved cycle effect in the example of FIG. In addition, the effects of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIGS. 272 and 273 are the same as the effects of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect in the example of FIG.

  In the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the holding cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period (first period) before the execution of SP reach.

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. In (A), a star-shaped image suggesting a pending change is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600. (B) is a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. In (B) to (E), the star-shaped image gradually approaches the reserved display area. From (B), the hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed simultaneously. In (B), the first frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (C), the second-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (D), the third-stage effects of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (E), the fourth frame effect of the reserved cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  In (F), the star-shaped image hits a hold corresponding to the change, and the hold corresponding to the change is changed to a star-shaped hold. Further, in (F), the first frame effect of the hold cycle effect without change and the hold cycle effect after change and the fifth frame effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed.

  In the example of FIG. 272, the hold change effect is completed at the start of the first frame of the hold cycle effect, but the hold change effect may be completed at any frame of the hold cycle effect. For example, when the hold change effect is completed at the start of the Nth frame (not the first frame) of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect after the change starts from the Nth frame simultaneously with the completion of the hold change effect. It may be started or may be started from the first frame. In addition, when the hold change effect is completed at the start of the Nth frame of the hold cycle effect, the hold cycle effect after the change is changed to the first frame at the timing when the hold cycle effect before the change returns to the first frame. You may start with.

  In (G), the second frame effect of the hold cycle effect without change and the hold cycle effect after change and the sixth frame effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (H), the third frame effect of the hold cycle effect without change and the hold cycle effect after change is executed, and the decorative symbol cycle effect returns to the effect of the first frame. Since the content of the production (the length of one cycle) differs between the on-hold on-hold cycle effect that has not changed and the on-hold on-hold cycle effect after the change, after (H) and after the on-hold change that has not changed It becomes clear that the movement is different from the hold. Thereby, a player's attention can be drawn to the hold | maintenance after a change with high expectation.

  In (I), the fourth frame effect of the non-changed hold and the changed hold cycle effect and the second effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed. In (J), the on-hold on-hold cycle effect that has not changed is returned to the first frame. It is running.

  In (K), the on-hold on-hold cycle effect that has not changed is the on-screen effect of the second frame, the on-screen hold on-cycle effect after the change is on the sixth side, Is running. In (L), the on-hold on-hold cycle effect after the change is returned to the first frame, and the on-hold on-hold cycle effect that has not changed is the on-screen effect of the third frame and the on-screen effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect. It is running.

  In the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect after the change are executed in the first period, but the hold after the change is changed in the second period and the third period. The cycle effect decoration symbol cycle effect may be executed. In the example of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of one cycle is the same in the reserved cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect, but they may be different. Hereinafter, regarding each pattern regarding the period during which the on-hold hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect after the change are performed and the length of one cycle in the on-hold hold cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect after the change explain.

  (1) When the length of one cycle (also referred to as a pre-change cycle) of the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is shorter than the length of one cycle (also referred to as the post-change cycle) of the hold time cycle effect after the change (Example of FIGS. 272 and 273).

  As in the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle, so that the visibility of the post-change hold is higher than the pre-change hold, and the post-change postponement is high. It can attract attention.

  (1-1) In the first period, a case where the reserved cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

  The first period is a period before the SP reach is executed, and is a period in which an effect with a high expectation is difficult to be executed. Further, the pending change effect is an effect that has a high expectation level among effects that can be executed in the first period. Since the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle, the post-change hold cycle production is executed in the first period, so that attention can be drawn to the post-change hold compared to before the change, Even in the first period in which a highly expected performance is difficult to execute, the player's expectation can be felt.

  On the other hand, depending on the type of on-hold display after the change, there are some things that do not have high expectation (for example, blue on-hold display). By executing the decorative symbol cycle effect simultaneously with the holding cycle effect in the first period to attract attention to the decorative symbol, the player is not given an excessive sense of expectation.

  In the first period, if the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect (also referred to as a decorative symbol cycle), attract attention to the postponement after the change compared to the decorative symbol cycle. Can give a strong sense of expectation to the player. This is particularly effective when the degree of expectation of the hold change effect is set high.

  In the first period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract more attention to the decorative design than the post-change hold, and the player's excessive expectation The effect of suppressing is strongly obtained. This is particularly effective when the degree of expectation of the hold change effect is set low. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. As a result, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative symbols even compared to the pre-change hold, so that the player's Suppressing expectations.

  In the first period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the pre-change cycle and shorter than the length of the post-change cycle. In the state before the change on hold, there is a possibility that a hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative symbol cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the post-change cycle being longer than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  In addition, when the post-change cycle is longer than the first period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the first period. Therefore, when the hold cycle effect continues even after the end of the first period, the one cycle is It is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold after the change until the end. For example, even when a highly expected performance is not performed immediately after the end of the first period, the player's expectation can be maintained by attracting attention to the hold after the change.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the first period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the first period, so that the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. In the first period, it is not highly likely that an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the on-hold change effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the expectation in the first period by attracting attention to the on-hold cycle effect. In this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the first period. Therefore, by performing a plurality of pre-change cycles in the first period, the visibility for the hold is improved, and the presence of the hold can be strongly appealed to the player.

  (1-2) In the second period, a case in which the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed at the same time.

  The second period is a period during which a high expectation SP reach is being executed. When the hold change effect is executed during the SP reach, there is a high possibility of changing to a hold display with a high expectation (for example, a red hold display or a special shape hold display). Since the post-change cycle is longer than the pre-change cycle, the post-change hold cycle effect is executed in the second period, thereby attracting attention not only to the SP reach but also the post-change hold in the second period. In the second period, the player's expectation can be raised synergistically.

  On the other hand, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect at the same time as the holding cycle effect in the second period, attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol, and the player can be firmly recognized that it is in the reach state.

  In the second period, if the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of the decorative design cycle, it can attract attention to the hold after the change compared to the decorative design cycle, giving the player a strong sense of expectation. Can do. This is particularly effective when the degree of expectation of the hold change effect is set high.

  In the second period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative design as compared to the post-change hold, and the player is in a reach state. The effect of suppressing the player's excessive expectation by the reserved change effect is strongly obtained. This is particularly effective when the expectation level of the hold display after the change is low. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. This makes it possible to attract more attention to the decorative design than the hold before the change, so that the player is in a reach state while expecting more of the change during the execution than the change after the next time. Recognize that.

  In the second period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the pre-change cycle and shorter than the length of the post-change cycle. In the state before the change on hold, there is a possibility that a hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative symbol cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the post-change cycle being longer than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  Further, when the post-change cycle is longer than the second period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the second period. In addition, after the second period, the third period is started. Therefore, even in the third period after the end of the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold after the change. For example, even if a result indicating a deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player is notified of the resurrection effect (the result indicating the difference in the judge effect) by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. It is possible to expect the generation of an effect that is executed after that and an effect in which a result indicating a big hit is notified.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the second period, the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect in order to execute a plurality of post-change cycles in the second period. It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. In particular, in the case of changing to a hold display with a high expectation (rather than the occurrence of SP reach), it is possible to enhance the expectation in the second period by attracting attention to the hold cycle effect. In this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the second period. Therefore, by executing a plurality of pre-change cycles in the second period, it is possible to appeal that there is a subsequent hold even if it is out of place, and to relieve excessive tension of the player. it can.

  (1-3) About the case where the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the third period.

  The third period is a period after the judge performance. When the hold cycle effect after the change is executed in the third period, when the discrepancy is notified in the judge effect, the player can make a resurrection effect by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. Can be expected to occur. In addition, the player can learn which hold display is a big hit or missed by making attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect.

  On the other hand, by executing the decorative symbol cycle effect at the same time as the holding cycle effect in the third period, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative symbol and to make the player firmly recognize the special lottery result. In addition, in the case of a disappointing display that has a particularly high degree of expectation, the disappointment can be reduced by attracting attention to the decorative pattern in order to feel disappointed with the reserved display. Can do.

  In the third period, when the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the postponement after the change compared to the decorative symbol after the judge effect. Since the special lottery result has already been notified by the judge production, there are many players who are more interested in which hold display is a big hit or off than confirming the special lottery result again. Can be improved.

  In the third period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative design as compared to the post-change holding. In the third period, the decorative symbol indicates the confirmed special lottery result after the judgment effect (except when the revival effect is executed), so that the effect of recognizing the special lottery result becomes stronger. In particular, when a big hit is informed, it is possible to improve the player's feeling of uplifting by strongly appealing the decorative symbol that is a combination of the big hit. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is shorter than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also shorter than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. This makes it possible to attract a lot of attention to the decorative symbols even when compared to the hold before the change, so that the player can receive the special lottery result while expecting more of the change in progress than the change after the next time. We make you recognize well.

  In the third period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be longer than the length of the pre-change cycle and shorter than the length of the post-change cycle. In the state before the change on hold, there is a possibility that a hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative symbol cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the post-change cycle being longer than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  Further, when the post-change cycle is longer than the third period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the third period. Therefore, the player is discouraged with respect to the hold after the change, especially when the deviation is notified in the judgment effect, but the change ends without the end of the post-change cycle, so it attracts excessive attention. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the third period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the third period, so the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. Therefore, when a deviation is notified in the judgment effect, the player can expect the occurrence of the revival effect by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. In addition, the player can learn which hold display is a big hit or missed by making attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect. In this case, since the cycle before change is shorter than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also shorter than the third period. Therefore, when a shift is notified in the judgment effect by performing a plurality of pre-change cycles in the third period, an effect of providing a sense of security to the player due to the suspension after the change Can be obtained greatly, and when the jackpot is informed by the judge performance, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for further jackpot in the fluctuation after the jackpot game.

  (2) When the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change.

  Unlike the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of the cycle before change may be shorter than the length of the cycle after change. Because the post-change cycle is shorter than the pre-change cycle, the visibility of the pre-change hold is higher than the post-change hold, reducing the player's excessive expectation of the post-change hold, and the fluctuation Since there is also a hold after, a sense of security can be provided to the player.

  (2-1) About the case where in the first period, the hold cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed simultaneously.

  In the first period, when the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle, attention can be drawn to the postponement after the change compared to the decorative symbol cycle, giving the player a strong sense of expectation. be able to. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. Therefore, the effect of providing the player with a sense of security can be greatly obtained by having the suspension after the change.

  In the first period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative design compared to the post-change postponement, and the player's excessive expectation A strong suppression effect is obtained. This is particularly effective when the degree of expectation of the hold change effect is set low.

  In the first period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the first period, the decorative symbol does not directly indicate the result of the special lottery. Further, in the state before the change on hold, the hold change effect is more likely to be executed, so pay attention to the hold before the change than the decorative symbol. By attracting the player, the player's expectation can be raised. The effect of the post-change cycle being shorter than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  In addition, when the post-change cycle is longer than the first period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the first period. Therefore, when the hold cycle effect continues even after the end of the first period, the one cycle is Until the game ends, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. For example, even when a highly expected performance is not performed immediately after the end of the first period, the player's expectation can be maintained by attracting attention to the hold after the change. In this case, since the post-change cycle is shorter than the pre-change cycle, the pre-change cycle is also longer than the first period. Therefore, since the cycle before the change does not end in the first period, if the hold cycle effect continues even after the end of the first period, the player is provided with a sense of security that there is a hold until the end of the one cycle. can do.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the first period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the first period, so that the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. In the first period, it is not highly likely that an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the on-hold change effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the expectation in the first period by attracting attention to the on-hold cycle effect.

  (2-2) In the second period, a case where the reserved cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are simultaneously executed.

  In the second period, if the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of the decorative design cycle, it can attract attention to the hold after the change compared to the decorative design cycle, giving the player a strong sense of expectation. Can do. This is particularly effective when the degree of expectation of the hold change effect is set high. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. Therefore, the effect of providing the player with a sense of security due to the suspension after the change can be greatly obtained.

  In the second period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative design as compared to the post-change hold, and the player is in a reach state. The effect of suppressing the player's excessive expectation by the reserved change effect is strongly obtained. This is particularly effective when the expectation level of the hold display after the change is low.

  In the second period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the second period, high-expectation SP reach is executed, so the player's excessive expectation for the reach state is suppressed by attracting attention to the hold before the change rather than the decorative pattern in the reach state. In addition, it is possible to provide a sense of security that there are fluctuations after the next time that are being held. The effect of the post-change cycle being shorter than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  Further, when the post-change cycle is longer than the second period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the second period. In addition, after the second period, the third period is started. Therefore, even in the third period after the end of the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the hold after the change. For example, even if a result indicating a deviation is notified in the judge effect, the player is notified of the resurrection effect (the result indicating the difference in the judge effect) by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. It is possible to expect the generation of an effect that is executed after that and an effect in which a result indicating a big hit is notified. In this case, since the cycle before change is longer than the cycle after change, the cycle before change is also longer than the second period. Accordingly, since one cycle of the pre-change cycle does not end in the second period, even in the third period after the end of the second period, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the post-change hold, and the next and subsequent times after the hold. It can provide a sense of security due to fluctuations.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the second period, the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect in order to execute a plurality of post-change cycles in the second period. It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. In particular, in the case of changing to a hold display with a high expectation (rather than the occurrence of SP reach), it is possible to enhance the expectation in the second period by attracting attention to the hold cycle effect.

  (2-3) In the third period, a case where the reserved cycle effect after the change and the decorative symbol cycle effect are executed simultaneously.

  In the third period, when the length of the post-change cycle is longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the postponement after the change compared to the decorative symbol after the judge effect. Since the special lottery result has already been notified by the judge production, there are many players who are more interested in which hold display is a big hit or off than confirming the special lottery result again. Can be improved. Further, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the decorative symbol cycle. Therefore, when the shift is notified in the judgment effect, the effect of providing a sense of security to the player due to the fact that there is a hold after the change is greatly obtained, and when the jackpot is notified in the judge effect, It is possible to give a sense of expectation to further jackpots in the fluctuations after the jackpot game.

  In the third period, when the length of the post-change cycle is shorter than the length of the decorative design cycle, it is possible to attract attention to the decorative design as compared to the post-change holding. In the third period, the decorative symbol indicates the confirmed special lottery result after the judgment effect (except when the revival effect is executed), so that the effect of recognizing the special lottery result becomes stronger. In particular, when a big hit is informed, it is possible to improve the player's feeling of uplifting by strongly appealing the decorative symbol that is a combination of the big hit.

  In the third period, the length of the decorative symbol cycle may be shorter than the length of the cycle before change and longer than the length of the cycle after change. In the state before the change on hold, there is a possibility that a hold change effect with high expectation may be executed, but for the player who thinks that the decorative design showing the special lottery result corresponding to the change is more important, the change It is desirable that the decorative symbol cycle is longer than the previous cycle. The effect of the post-change cycle being shorter than the decorative symbol cycle is as described above.

  Further, when the post-change cycle is longer than the third period, one cycle of the post-change cycle does not end in the third period. Therefore, the player is disappointed with respect to the hold after the change, especially when the shift is notified in the judge performance, but the change ends without the end of the post-change cycle. It is not attracted and can prevent the player from being discouraged. In addition, since the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change, in this case, the cycle before change is also longer than the length of the third period. Accordingly, since one cycle of the pre-change cycle does not end in the third period, it is possible to suppress excessive attention to the hold indicating the next change, and to make the player firmly recognize the special lottery result in the change being executed. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the post-change cycle is shorter than the third period, a plurality of post-change cycles are executed in the third period, so the player recognizes that the hold cycle effect is a periodic effect, and after the change It is possible to attract more attention to the suspension of. Therefore, when a deviation is notified in the judgment effect, the player can expect the occurrence of the revival effect by paying attention to the hold after the change with high expectation. In addition, the player can learn which hold display is a big hit or missed by making attention to the changed hold display after the judge effect.

  (3) When the length of the cycle before change is longer than the length of the cycle after change.

  Unlike the examples of FIGS. 272 and 273, the length of the cycle before change and the length of the cycle after change may be the same. Because the length of the cycle before change and the length of the cycle after change are the same, the visibility of the hold after the change and the hold before the change becomes the same level. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation due to the performance in a well-balanced manner. In particular, for example, when the hold display movement in the hold cycle effect is the same in the hold before the change and the hold after the change, for example, in the hold cycle effect in the hold before the change and the hold after the change. The change timing of the hold may be determined so that the movement of the hold display is synchronized. By synchronizing the movement of the hold display before and after the change, the visibility of the hold display as a whole is improved. For example, the player can easily count the number of holds.

  In the above-described example, the decoration symbol includes a number and a character in any of the first period, the second period, and the third period. For example, the second period and the third period (that is, the decoration symbol). In the period in which the display size is smaller than the first period, the period in which a highly anticipated performance is being performed, or the period after the special lottery result is notified to the player), the decorative symbol is a number (that is, It may be expressed only with the minimum information necessary for the player to grasp the special lottery result. In this case, the decorative symbol cycle effect in the second period and the third period is realized by movement of numbers.

  In addition, a plurality of types of on-hold cycle effects with different display modes may exist. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of on-hold cycle effects having different lengths of one cycle may exist, and a plurality of on-hold display modes differ for at least one frame even if the length of one cycle is the same. There may be different types of hold cycle effects.

  Further, the appearance rate and the jackpot expectation level and the appearance rate in the variation may be different for the plurality of types of holding cycle effects. For example, the degree of expectation may be higher as the length of one cycle is longer, and the degree of expectation may be higher as the length of one cycle is shorter. Also, for example, even if the length of one cycle is the same, a hold cycle effect in which the hold display has effects and a hold cycle effect with a large amount of movement of the hold display are expected compared to other hold cycle effects. The degree may be set high.

  In addition, for example, the appearance rate is set to be lower for a reserved cycle effect with higher expectation. In addition, as for the hold cycle effect in the hold after the change in hold, it is desirable to indicate the expected degree of fluctuation corresponding to the hold after the change. Note that there may be a plurality of types of effects with different display modes for the decorative symbol cycle effects, and the display mode, the expectation level, and the appearance rate are the same as those described for the reserved cycle effect.

  Further, depending on the effect stage, a hold cycle effect whose length of one cycle is different may be executed. For example, one or a plurality of stage stages in which a one-cycle length is long (for example, eight frames) is executed, and a one-cycle stage in which a one-cycle length is normal (for example, six frames) is executed. Alternatively, it is assumed that there are a plurality of effect stages and one or a plurality of effect stages in which a hold cycle effect is executed with a short cycle length (for example, 4 frames).

  When transitioning to an effect stage in which the length of one cycle in the hold cycle effect is increased, the effect stage after the transition tends to attract attention to the hold display compared to the effect stage before the transfer. Therefore, for example, when an effect stage having a longer length of one cycle in the hold cycle effect is set to be more easily executed, the effect stage having a longer length of one cycle in the hold cycle effect is more effective against the big hit. When the expectation is high), attention to the hold change effect is easily gathered, and the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

  On the other hand, when transitioning to an effect stage where the length of one cycle in the hold cycle effect is shortened, the effect stage before the transition tends to attract attention to the hold display compared to the effect stage after the transition. . Therefore, for example, when the stage in which the length of one cycle in the hold cycle stage is shorter is set so that the stage outside the hold display area of the stage display device 1600 is more easily executed, the stage is shifted to the hold display. While attracting attention, the attention to the hold display is lowered compared with the stage before the transition, and attention is paid to the production outside the hold display area.

  In addition, although the stage stage before the transition tends to attract attention to the hold display, the stage stage having a short one-cycle length in the hold cycle stage may have a higher expectation for the big hit. In this case, since the player is paying attention to the stage before the transition, if the player hits the stage with a short length of one cycle, the player can be surprised.

  Moreover, the transition between the production | presentation stages in which the hold cycle production with the same 1-cycle length may be performed. If the transition to a stage with a different length of one cycle is frequently performed, the player's attention level with respect to the hold display changes each time, and some players feel calm and unable to play the game. Transition between production stages having the same length of one cycle is executed.

  You may make it give a law property to the transition of such a production stage. For example, “a stage with a long one cycle → a stage with a short one cycle → a stage with the same length of one cycle → a stage with a long one cycle” or a stage with a high expectation → There is a production stage where the holding cycle is shortened or a stage where the holding cycle is long. In addition, for example, when a deviation is notified in a predetermined effect at a predetermined effect stage, there is a law such as shifting to a normal effect stage with the next change.

  Note that the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect may be different for each of the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. However, it is desirable that the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect in each gaming state is shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the gaming state. That is, when the shortest variation time that can be selected in the short-time gaming state is shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the normal gaming state, the length of one cycle of the holding cycle effect in the normal gaming state is the short-time game. It becomes longer than the length of one cycle of the on-hold cycle effect.

  If the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect is shorter than the shortest variation time that can be selected in the gaming state, when the variation pattern of the shortest variation time is selected, This is because it is difficult to execute the effect of one cycle of the hold cycle effect with one change, and it is difficult to attract the player's attention to the hold display.

[20-2. Hold cycle production and status display cycle production]
FIG. 274 and FIG. 275 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in which a hold cycle effect and a state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed. The state display cycle effect is a specific zone (a production zone with high expectation for a big hit, and may be executed over a plurality of variations, or may be displayed at a predetermined timing within one variation. The display indicating that the user is staying in (good) is an effect that changes periodically. In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the user is staying in the super pine zone described above as the specific zone.

  In the example of FIG. 274 and FIG. 275, the hold change effect is executed, and the hold cycle effect of normal hold (no change hold) is repeated with 4 frames as one cycle, and the hold after change (red hold) ) Hold cycle effect repeats the effect with 6 frames as one cycle.

  In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the effect of each frame of the normal hold cycle effect in the normal hold is the same as the effect of each frame of the hold cycle effect in the example of FIG. 266. The effect of the frame is the same as the effect of each frame of the reserved cycle effect in the example of FIG.

  In the state display cycle effect, a band indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone (“in the super pine zone...”) Is displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. In the status display cycle effect, the characters “Staying in the super pine zone ...” move one character to the left in the band for each frame, and the character that has reached the left end of the band is displayed in the next frame. By reappearing from the right end, periodic display is realized.

  By executing the status display cycle effect, it is possible to avoid that the status display completely blends into the background, so that the player can easily see that he / she is staying in a specific zone with high expectation This makes it possible to properly recognize that you are staying in a specific zone and improve the player's expectation.

  In addition, the status display cycle effect and the pending hold cycle effect after the change are executed at the same time, so that the status display indicating that the user is staying in a specific zone with a high expectation, and the hold display after the change Since attention can be drawn to both sides, the player's expectation is synergistically improved by the two effects. Therefore, when the expected degree of holding after the change is low (for example, blue holding), in order not to reduce the player's expectation due to staying in the specific zone, the holding cycle effect of the holding after the change is not executed. May be.

  In addition, the status display cycle effect and the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change are executed at the same time, so that the status display indicating that you are staying in a specific zone with a high expectation, and the hold display before the change, Because it can attract attention to both sides, the player has a sense of expectation due to staying in a specific zone and a sense of security due to the suspension of fluctuations from the next time, even if it deviates from the specific zone. Can be provided.

  In addition, the state display cycle effect repeats the effect of nine frames as one cycle. That is, the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the pre-change cycle and the post-change cycle. The expectation level in the state of staying in a specific zone is higher than that in the state in which most of the change hold is selected (specifically, for example, when a hold change effect is executed, (If the ratio of the higher-priced pending change effect is selected is 10% or less), the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the post-change cycle. It is possible to attract more attention to the status display than the hold display of the player, thereby improving the player's expectation.

  In addition, since the degree of expectation when staying in a specific zone as described above is very high, the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect before the change. Thus, it is possible to provide satisfaction to a player who is more entertaining when attention is improved by focusing on the status display, rather than focusing on the hold display before the change.

  In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the hold cycle effect and the state display cycle effect are simultaneously executed in the period (first period) before the execution of SP reach. In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, since all the decorative symbols are changing, the decorative symbol cycle effect is not executed, but the state where some or all of the decorative symbols are stopped (the position of the decorative symbol does not change). In the state), the decorative symbol cycle effect may be executed simultaneously with the state display cycle effect.

  (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. In (A), the hold display corresponding to the next change is changed to red hold. Further, in (A), the hold cycle effect and the state display cycle effect in the hold before the change and the hold after the change start. In addition, the period of (A)-(I) is a period when all the decoration symbols are changing in the said change. In (A), the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change, the on-hold hold cycle effect after the change, and the first frame effect of the state display cycle effect are executed. It should be noted that the first frame effect of the state display cycle effect is a state in which the first character of the character in the belt is displayed at the right end portion in the belt as shown in FIG.

  In (B), the on-holding cycle effect before the change, the on-holding cycle effect after the change, and the second effect of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (C), the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change, the on-hold hold cycle effect after the change, and the third frame effect of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (D), the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change, the on-hold hold cycle effect after the change, and the fourth frame effect of the state display cycle effect are executed.

  In (E), the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is returned to the first frame, and the hold on-cycle effect after change and the fifth frame effect of the state display cycle effect are executed. In (F), the second frame effect of the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is executed, and the sixth frame effect of the hold on-cycle effect and the state display cycle effect after the change is executed. In (G), the third frame effect of the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the hold cycle effect on hold after the change is returned to the first frame, and the seventh frame effect of the state display cycle effect is executed. Has been.

  In (H), the fourth frame effect of the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the second effect of the hold time cycle effect after the change is executed, and the eighth frame of the state display cycle effect is executed. Production is being performed. In (I), the second frame of the hold cycle effect of the hold before the change is executed, the third frame of the hold cycle effect of the hold after the change is executed, and the ninth frame of the state display cycle effect is executed. Production is being performed.

  In (J), the third frame effect of the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is executed, the fourth frame effect of the hold cycle effect on hold after the change is executed, and the state display cycle effect is set to the first frame. Return.

  In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the cycle before change is 4 frames, and the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is 9 frames. That is, while one cycle of the status display cycle effect (that is, the effect of which the length of one cycle is the longest among the cycle effects that are simultaneously executed) is executed, the pending cycle effect before the change (that is, executed simultaneously) Among the cycle effects, a plurality of cycles of the effect having the shortest cycle length is executed.

  As a result, before one cycle of the state display cycle effect is completed, the player recognizes that the on-hold hold cycle effect before the change is a periodic effect, so one cycle of the state display cycle effect. At the time before ending, the player's attention can be drawn to the on-hold holding cycle effect before the change, and then the player's attention can be shifted to the state display cycle effect.

  In the example of FIGS. 274 and 275, the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the cycle before the change and the post-change cycle, but the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is longer than the cycle after the change. It may be shorter or shorter than the cycle before change.

  Since the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than the cycle after the change, the hold display after the change attracts more attention than the state display. When the jackpot determined rainbow color hold is selected, it is possible to give the player a strong feeling of uplifting. In addition, when the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than the post-change cycle, for example, when the specific zone effect and the hold change are executed as the pre-read effect as in the examples of FIGS. 274 and 275, By paying attention to the hold after the change, it is possible to make the player firmly recognize which change is the change in which the SP reach in the specific zone is executed.

  In addition, since the length of one cycle of the state display cycle effect is shorter than the cycle before the change, the hold display before the change attracts more attention than the state display. Thus, excessive tension with respect to the specific zone can be suppressed.

  In FIGS. 274 and 275, the state display cycle effect and the hold cycle effect are displayed so as not to overlap. By doing in this way, both recognition can be clarified. In addition, the state display cycle effect and the part or all of the hold cycle effect may be overlapped. This is because, by overlapping, both (state display cycle effect and hold cycle effect) can be recognized only by paying attention to the overlapped portion. In FIG. 274 and FIG. 275, the decorative symbol cycle is not shown, but even when the state display cycle effect and the decorative symbol cycle effect are compared, they can be similarly overlapped or not overlapped.

  Up to this point, an explanation has been given of effects in which a plurality of cycle effects are executed simultaneously, but it goes without saying that the cycle effects may include cycle effects other than the decorative symbol cycle effects, the reserved cycle effects, and the state cycle effects.

  Specifically, for example, the cycle effect includes a fourth symbol cycle effect. The fourth symbol is a symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 or another display device (for example, an LED display). In addition, the fourth symbol is a symbol that suggests separately from the decorative symbol, for example, whether a special lottery result corresponding to a special symbol variation being executed or most recently executed, or whether a special symbol variation is being performed, For example, it is desirable to display in a size smaller than the decorative design.

  For example, the fourth symbol also fluctuates while the decorative symbol fluctuates. In the 4th symbol variation, for example, a 4th symbol (for example, a circle) indicating that the special lottery result is a win and a 4th symbol (for example, a cross) indicating that the result is out of order are alternately displayed 2 A cycle effect consisting of frames (also called a fourth symbol cycle effect) is repeated. Therefore, when the decorative symbol cycle effect is being executed, the fourth symbol cycle effect is also executed simultaneously.

  By executing the fourth symbol cycle effect, it is possible to attract attention to the fourth symbol that most directly shows the special lottery result, so that the interest of the player who places more importance on the special lottery result than the effect is improved. Further, the length of one cycle is preferably shorter than the length of one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect. As a result, while attracting attention to the fourth symbol that shows the special lottery result most directly, it is possible to attract more attention to the decorative symbol that also functions as a production while showing the special lottery result. The special lottery result can be surely recognized while enjoying the production.

[21. Multiple types of design]
FIG. 276 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. The effect display device 1600 includes a decorative symbol display area 1611. In the decorative symbol display area 1611, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in the lower right order. The decorative symbol functions as a first effect symbol.

  In the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol display area 1611 includes a plurality of second effect symbol display areas. In the example of FIG. 276, the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the second effect symbol display area 1612 arranged in the upper right part of the area where the medium decoration symbol is displayed, and in the lower left part of the area where the medium decoration symbol is displayed. And a second effect symbol display area 1612. Hereinafter, the second effect symbol displayed in the second effect symbol display region 1612 in the upper right part is also referred to as the upper right symbol, and the second effect symbol displayed in the second effect symbol display region 1612 in the lower left part is also referred to as the lower left symbol.

  As described above, the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 1611 is that the game ball B has passed through the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (these starting ports are also referred to as first passing ports hereinafter). It fluctuates with that. The second effect symbol displayed in the second effect symbol display area 1612 fluctuates when the game ball B passes through a second passage opening different from the first passage opening described above. The second passage opening is a passage opening that is different from the passage openings (that is, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004) that are used to change the decorative design. For example, a predetermined general winning opening 2001 (for example, Of the general winning award 2001). That is, even if the game ball B passes through the second passage, the decoration symbol displayed in the decoration symbol display area 1611 does not start to change.

  For example, when the game ball B passes through the second passage port, the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol fluctuate and stop after the lapse of the variation time. The variation time of the second effect symbol may be a predetermined time, or may be determined according to a predetermined variation pattern such as a special symbol variation time or a normal symbol variation time. Further, when the game ball B passes through the second passage opening during the variation of the second effect symbol, the second effect symbol variation may be suspended with a predetermined number as the upper limit, as in the special symbol variation, You don't have to.

  FIG. 276 shows an example in which the second effect symbol variation is performed in a state where the decorative symbol variation is not performed. (A) is a state in which both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, all symbols are in a stopped state). In (A), the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same as in FIG. 266 (six symbol decorative cycle effect). (B) is a state in which neither the special symbol variation nor the second effect symbol variation is executed, and the second effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed.

  (C) is a state in which the game ball B has passed through the second passage and the second effect symbol variation has started. In (C), the special symbol variation is not executed, and the third effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. Even when the special symbol variation is not executed, the second effect symbol variation is executed, so that it can appear to the player that a lottery is being performed, so that the player is bored. There is no. Specifically, the upper right symbol, the lower left symbol, and the central decorative symbol (middle decorative symbol) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 1611 are arranged in a straight line, so that three identical symbols are aligned ( It is an effect that makes you feel as if you have a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination.

  In the example of FIG. 276, the second effect symbol variation is an effect for so-called liveliness that does not give a player a privilege even if any combination of symbols stops. That is, in the example of FIG. 276, only the lottery for determining the stop symbol of the second effect symbol variation is performed based on the game ball B entering the second passage opening, but the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol are performed. The stop symbols are determined so that the stop symbols are not the same. As described above, since the second effect symbol variation is merely a lively effect, it is desirable that the player does not give too much expectation to the player.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the second effect symbol is displayed smaller than the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result. Also, it is desirable that the number of types of second effect symbols is smaller than the types of decorative symbols. For example, the decorative symbol includes 10 types of symbols each including numbers 0 to 9, and the second effect symbol includes seven types of symbols each including numbers 1 to 7. In addition, unlike the decorative design, the second effect design preferably does not include a character and is expressed only by numbers.

  In addition, in order not to give too much expectation to the player, the number of variation effects of the second effect symbol is small (specifically, for example, the number of effect patterns of the decorative symbol is less than or equal to 1 It should be a pattern). As an effect of the one pattern, in each of the second effect symbol display areas 1612, a periodic effect in which an effect in which the second effect symbol changes in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 is one cycle. Is executed. It is desirable that the time of one cycle is short (for example, shorter (about 0.5 seconds) than one cycle effect (decorative symbol cycle effect or hold cycle effect)). This is because the attention to the second effect symbol is suppressed as compared with the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result. When the second effect symbol is stopped, each second effect symbol in the second effect symbol display area 1612 is replaced with the determined stop symbol.

  In addition, about the decoration symbol which shows a special lottery result, a display size and a display position differ, for example during normal fluctuation | variation and execution of SP reach production. The second effect symbol display area 1612 does not overlap with the decorative symbol even when the display size and display position of the decorative symbol are changed in order not to disturb the visual recognition of the decorative symbol indicating the special lottery result. It is desirable to be provided at a position.

  As in the example of FIG. 276, the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol may be displayed in one display device (effect display device 1600) or may be displayed on another display device. However, when the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed on different display devices, the display positions of the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol are close (for example, in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the decorative symbol. It is desirable that the distance (eg, within 30 cm) is sufficient to include two effect symbols.

  In addition, the special lottery result that the combination of the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol, and one decorative symbol (for example, the middle decorative symbol) when the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol are stopped opens the winning prize opening It is desirable not to be a combination of a stop pattern of a decorative symbol that reports (for example, a big hit and a small hit). Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all set to stop at the same number at the end of the big hit variation and the small hit variation, the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol are set. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the second effect symbol is determined so that at least one of the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at different numbers. If the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol, and the middle decoration symbol are all stopped at the same number at the end of the deviation variation, no benefits will be granted even though the variation variation has ended. This is because the player may be misunderstood. However, during the big hit fluctuation, the lower left symbol, the upper right symbol, and the middle decorative symbol may be stopped at the same number.

  FIG. 277 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. FIG. 277 shows an example in which the second effect symbol variation starts during the reach of the decorative symbol, and the second effect symbol variation continues even after the decoration symbol variation ends. (A) is a state in which both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, all symbols are in a stopped state). In (B), the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the special symbol variation has started, and the decorative symbol variation has started. On the other hand, the second effect symbol variation is not executed.

  In (C), the decorative symbol reach state has started. In (C), the first frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect is the same as in FIG. 266 (six symbol decorative cycle effect). In (D), the reach state is continuing, and a two-frame effect of a decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. Moreover, in (D), the game ball B has passed through the second passage, and the second effect symbol variation has started. In (E), the special symbol variation is finished, and the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of detachment. In (E), the variation of the second effect symbol continues.

  In (E), the combination of decorative symbol outages stops and the player is shown that the special lottery result is out, but the second stage design is still fluctuating, so it will still win some lottery. It is possible to show the player as if there is a chance to remain, and as a result, the player's expectation can be improved.

  As described above, it is desirable that the number of types of second effect symbols is smaller than the type of decorative symbols. As in (E), if the number of types of second effect symbols is equal to or greater than the number of types of decorative symbols, it is difficult to win the second effect symbol when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped. The player guesses (for example, the player could feel that it is harder to win the 15 types of 2nd stage design because 10 types of decorative symbols could not be won), and improve expectation Because you can't.

  FIG. 278 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect using a plurality of types of effect symbols. FIG. 278 shows an example in which the second effect symbol variation starts in a state where all the decorative symbols are varied. (A) is a state in which both the special symbol variation and the second effect symbol variation are not executed (that is, all symbols are in a stopped state). In (B), the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the special symbol variation has started, and the decorative symbol variation has started. On the other hand, the second effect symbol variation is not executed.

  In (C), the state where all the decorative symbols are changing continues. Moreover, (C) is a state in which the game ball B has passed through the second passage and the second effect symbol variation has started. In (D), the decorative symbol reach state is started, and the first effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are the same as those in FIG. 266 (six decorative symbol cycle effect). Moreover, in (D), the fluctuation | variation of the 2nd production symbol is continuing. In (E), the reach state is continuing, and a two-frame effect of a decorative symbol cycle effect is performed. In (E), the variation of the second effect symbol continues.

  As shown in (C), when all the decorative symbols and all the second effect symbols are fluctuating, the lottery result notification is made on the W line (the symbol consisting of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol). The line can be recognized by the player as in the case of a combination line, and a combination of a lower left symbol, a center decoration symbol, and an upper right symbol), thereby improving the player's expectation. Can do.

  In order to allow the player to recognize the W line in this way, both when displaying the decorative design and the second effect design on the same display device and when displaying them on another display device, It is desirable that the arrangement of the two effect symbols is not parallel to the line composed of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol.

[22. Replay production]
Hereinafter, the replay effect will be described. A replay effect is, for example, a notification of a divergence of an effect with a high degree of expectation in a certain fluctuation, and then performing the effect with a high degree of expectation again during the fluctuation, It is a production that explains the points that have a major impact. 279, 280, and 281 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a replay effect. (A) is a state where the fluctuation has started. In (B), the decorative design is in a reach state.

  (C) is a state where SP reach has started. When the SP reach is started, the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left, middle upper, and upper right portions of the effect display device 1600, respectively. Note that the decorative symbol cycle effect starts from (C), and the decorative symbol cycle effect continues during SP reach execution. That is, the decorative symbol cycle effect continues until (G). The effect contents of each frame of the decorative symbol cycle effect are the same as those in FIG. 267 (four decorative symbol cycle effect).

  In FIGS. 279 (C) to (F), the decorative symbol cycle effect seems to be progressing one frame at a time, but between (C) and (D), (D) and (E) , Between (E) and (F), and between (F) and (G) need not be one frame, and may be longer than one frame.

  Subsequently, in (D), SP reach is ongoing, and the display “Janken ...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), the display is erased from the effect display device 1600. In (F), Janken's hand is displayed. In (F), a state in which the teammate character lost the Janken game is displayed.

  In (G), the display of “unfortunate ...” indicating that the teammate character has lost to Janken, that is, the special lottery result has been lost (except when a revival effect is subsequently performed) is displayed in the effect display device. Displayed at 1600, the decorative pattern of the combination of outliers is stopped.

  In (H), the display size and the display position of the decorative symbol of the combination of the deviations are returned to the original position (that is, the state before the start of SP reach), and the display of “sorry ...” does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Has moved to. In the example of FIG. 279, the size of the decorative design after the judge effect is the same as the size of the decorative design before SP reach, but is smaller than the decorative design before SP reach and from the decorative design in SP reach. May be larger. In (H), the first effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. Note that another image (eg, a blackout image) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 between (G) and (H).

  In (I), the second effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (J), the third effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (K), the fourth frame effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (L), the decorative symbol cycle effect has been completed, that is, the movement of the decorative symbol is completely stopped. In the example of FIG. 279 and FIG. 280, one cycle of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed from the end of the judge effect until the movement of the decorative symbol completely stops. May be executed.

  The replay effect starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the stop state (L) (for example, after 5 seconds). The replay effect is performed with the same variation as the variation in which the SP reach is executed. In (M), a display indicating that the replay effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), the state of (B) is replayed, and the decorative symbol is in the reach state.

  In (O), the state of (C) has been replayed and the SP reach has started. However, it is assumed that the decorative symbol and the hold display are erased during the SP reach replay (that is, in a predetermined period after the elapse of a predetermined time since the (L) stop state started). Since the special lottery result for the change has already been announced, there is no need to display the decorative symbol, and the hold display is also erased, so that the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the replay effect of the high expectation SP reach. Can do. Note that, for example, for a player who wants to accurately confirm the SP reach replay effect, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment may be possible during the replay effect.

  In (O), unlike the state in (C), the display “line is black ...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display indicates to the player that if the display color of the line “Janken is a game!” Is a color other than black (for example, red), the expectation is higher than that of black. It is a display to do.

  In (P), the state of (D) is being replayed, SP reach is continuing, and the display “Janken ...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (Q), the state of (E) is replayed. However, unlike the state of (E), the display “1” did not appear… ”is displayed on the effect display device 1600. . In the state of (E), when the display that prompts the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed, the degree of expectation is higher than when the display that prompts the central pressing operation unit 303a to not be pressed is performed. It is a display that suggests to the player that the price is higher.

  In (R), a display that prompts the center pressing operation unit 303a to press is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This display is the same display as that displayed during SP reach with high expectation. Further, when a display for prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a appears, a display indicating “I'm coming out like this!” Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display prompting the user to press the central pressing operation unit 303a in (R) is not displayed in the SP reach actually performed before the replay effect, but introduces a display pattern with high expectation to the player. In order to be displayed.

  In a state where the display for prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is in an effective state. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in this state, a cut like (S) is performed. In is displayed. The cut-in is the same as the cut-in displayed during SP reach. Furthermore, a display indicating that “there is such a cut-in when pressed” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the effective state. The cut-in in (S) is not displayed in the SP reach actually performed before the replay effect, but is displayed in order to introduce a display pattern with high expectation to the player.

  In (T), the state of (F) is replayed, and a state where the teammate character has lost the Janken game is displayed. In (U), the state of (G) is replayed, a display of “sorry ...” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the decorative pattern of the combination of detachment is stopped.

  In (V), the state of (H) is replayed. As shown in (H), for the replay effect in which the decorative symbol is displayed large after the judge effect and returned to the original position, unlike the SP reach, the decorative symbol and the hold display are again displayed in the effect display device 1600. Is displayed. In (W), the state of (I) is replayed, and the second effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed.

  In (X), the state of (J) is replayed and the third effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In (Z), the state of (K) is replayed and the fourth effect of the decorative symbol cycle effect is executed. In this way, in the replay effect, the state until just before the decorative symbol completely stops is replayed. Regarding the decorative symbol cycle effect after the judge effect, only less than one cycle (that is, 3 frames or less) may be replayed and the replay effect may be terminated. This is because there are players who are not interested in the production after the judge production.

  In (Z), the decoration symbol is completely stopped, and the fluctuation ends after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed. The replay effect includes a state in which the decorative symbol is completely stopped, that is, (Z) can be considered as a replay effect in which the state of (L) is replayed. In addition, when the next variation is a variation pattern capable of executing the replay effect, the replay effect may be displayed repeatedly in the next variation.

[23. Reservation cycle production and movable body production]
FIG. 282 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which the hold cycle effect and the movable body effect are simultaneously executed. The hold cycle effect repeats the effect with 4 frames as one cycle. The effects of each frame of the reserved cycle effect in the example of FIG. 282 are the same as the effects of each frame of the reserved cycle effect in the example of FIG.

  In the example of FIG. 282, when the hold cycle effect is being executed, a part of the hold display is hidden by the movable body (here, it is assumed that it is the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310). Move to a position that overlaps the hold display.

  In (A), the first frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed. Moreover, in (A), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located at an initial position (a position where all areas of all the reserved displays are visible). In (B), the second effect of the hold cycle effect is executed. In (B), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is moved to the ascending position (a position where at least a part of the reserved display corresponding to at least one variation is hidden by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310). Thus, a part of the hold display (the entire area of the hold display corresponding to the variation being executed) is hidden.

  In (C), the third effect of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (C), since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains in the raised position, a part of the hold display (all areas of the hold display corresponding to the change being executed and the next change) Some areas of hold display to be hidden).

  In (D), the fourth frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed. Further, in (D), because the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains in the raised position, a part of the hold display (all areas of the hold display corresponding to the change being executed and the next change) The entire area of the hold display to be hidden) is hidden.

  In (E), it returns to the production of the first frame of the hold cycle production. Moreover, in (E), since the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has returned to the initial position, all the areas of the hold display are visible. In (F), the second frame effect of the hold cycle effect is executed. Moreover, in (F), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 remains at the initial position.

  That is, as described above, in the example of FIG. 282, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned upward during the period from the second frame to the fourth frame of the hold cycle effect, thereby hiding a part of the hold display. .

  During execution of the hold cycle effect, the player visually recognizes the hidden frame effect (2-4 frames in FIG. 282) by hiding the hold display in a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect. Because it is not possible, it tries to confirm the production of the hidden frame in the next and subsequent cycles. Thereby, in a period of 1 cycle or more, the player's attention can be collected on the hold display, and a sense of security due to the hold can be provided to the player.

  In addition, during execution of the hold cycle effect after executing the hold cycle effect for one cycle or more, the hold display is hidden for a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect, thereby rendering the hidden frame effect (2 in FIG. 282). Some players have a sense of expectation that the 4th frame) has changed.

  In the example of FIG. 282, the movable body hides the hold display only once during the execution of the hold cycle effect, but hides the hold display in a time shorter than one cycle of the hold cycle effect and shows the hold display again. And may be repeated a plurality of times. In other words, the movable body is also in a state where a cycle effect is performed in which one cycle is that moving from the initial position to the rising position and returning to the initial position again. Thereby, the strobe effect can be realized in the hold cycle effect, and the player's expectation can be enhanced. However, in order to obtain the strobe effect remarkably, it is desirable that the time during which the hold display is shown in the repetition is short (for example, less than the time for which the hold display is hidden in the repetition).

  Further, during execution of the hold cycle effect, the movable body may hide the hold display for a time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect. In particular, unlike the example of FIG. 282, when the entire area of all the holding displays is hidden, the holding cycle effect is hidden for a long time by the movable body, so that the player stays on the holding display for a while, When the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display (that is, all the areas of the hold display are visible), it is estimated that the hold cycle effect that has been hidden will have ended. Alternatively, the player may forget that the hold cycle effect was being executed in the first place. In such a situation, when the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display, if the hold cycle effect is continued, the player may have high expectation for the change being held ( For example, it may be estimated that a hold change effect or the like will occur with respect to the hold, and a sense of expectation can be obtained. In addition, even when the movable body hides the hold display for a time longer than one cycle of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect, it hides the hold display and shows the hold display again multiple times. It may be repeated.

  In addition, the movable body may hide the hold display at the same time as one cycle of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect. Since the hold display time hidden by the movable body is the same as the length of one cycle of the hold cycle effect, one cycle of the hold cycle and the move effect of the movable body are synchronized. Accordingly, the player can think that the hold cycle effect and the moving effect of the movable body are associated with each other, and can have a sense of expectation.

  Further, during execution of the hold cycle effect, the movable body may hide the hold display at the same time as the N cycle (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the hold cycle effect. As a result, when the hold display becomes visible again after the hold cycle effect is hidden, the effect is resumed from the continuation of the frame immediately before the hold cycle is hidden, so the hold display is hidden. Also, the player can recognize the connection of one cycle of the hold cycle effect.

  In addition, during execution of the hold cycle effect, the movable body hides the hold display at the same time as the X cycle of the hold cycle effect (X is a non-integer greater than 0, for example, 1.5 cycle, 2.25 cycle, etc.). May be. In the example of FIG. 282, when the movable body hides the hold display at the same time as the 1.5 cycles of the hold cycle effect during execution of the hold cycle effect, the player has 1 cycle and 1 of the next cycle. The effect of the frame and the second frame cannot be visually recognized, and can be visually recognized from the effect of the third frame of the next cycle. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the effects of the first frame and the second frame may have been changed.

  Also, as shown in the example of FIG. 282, by hiding a part of the hold display corresponding to a certain change (hold display corresponding to the next change in (C)) Although the content of the on-hold cycle effect has not changed, the player infers that the content of the effect has changed for an area that cannot be viewed. That is, since the player is very interested in the hold display, the player can attract attention to the hold display. In addition, since the player pays attention to the hold display, the movable body that hides the hold display also enters the field of view, and as a result, the player can also draw attention to the moving effect of the movable body.

  Further, as shown in the example of FIG. 282, by hiding all areas of the hold display corresponding to a certain change (for example, the hold display corresponding to the change being executed in (B) to (D)), other changes are made. A player who recognizes that the hold cycle effect continues for the hold display corresponding to, the content of the hold cycle effect does not change or the hold change does not occur for the hold display. I can guess it and have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, unlike the example of FIG. 282, all areas of all on-hold displays may be hidden during execution of the on-hold cycle effect. As a result, the player's consciousness once goes completely to the moving effect of the movable body, but even after the movable body is no longer positioned on the hold display (that is, all the areas of the hold display are visible). When the hold display cycle effect continues, the player pays attention to the hold display again. That is, when the player's consciousness goes from the movable body to the hold display again, an excessive sense of expectation for the moving effect of the movable body can be suppressed, and a sense of security due to the presence of the hold can be provided.

  In addition, the player may realize the above-described holding peeping effect by hiding the holding display during execution of the holding cycle effect. Thereby, the player can have a great expectation.

  As described so far, since the movable body can hide the hold display during execution of the hold cycle effect, the player can have a sense of expectation. It is desirable that the change is performed by a change in which the reach effect is executed) or a change in which the pre-reading effect is executed with respect to a change with high expectation.

  In the example of FIG. 282, the movable body hides the hold display, but the hold display may be hidden by another effect image or the like. As the other effect images, there are an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 with priority over the hold display (that is, on the front surface), an image displayed by causing a predetermined light guide plate to emit light, and the like.

[24. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back movable movable body 3110 in the back back rendering unit 3100 has a transparent guide behind the decorative member made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A light radiation plate 3113 and a back and back decoration board 3114 are provided, and mounted on the front surface of the back and back decoration board 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Are reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and are emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Then, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) having light properties are decorated with light emission.

  At this time, the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body Since the 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 are decorated to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is directed forward. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Accordingly, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused widely, and it can be prevented from appearing to emit light in a dot shape. The sheet 3112 can be lightly decorated without unevenness and can be displayed beautifully, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the back-back movable decorative body 3110, since the back-side decorative board 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative member (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced. It is possible to make it easy to secure a space for arranging the back movable ornament 3110, and to arrange other effect members (back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top rear rotating decorative body 3440, etc.) It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make it easy to secure a space to be played and that can make the player more entertaining by providing various production members.

  Furthermore, the decorative member (back movable movable body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are configured, the embossed portion can give the decorative portion 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the embossed portion can be embossed. A feeling of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side by the lens effect. Therefore, the depth of the three-dimensional decoration (decoration part 3150) can be shown to the player by the embossed part of the decoration body 3111 and the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112. Therefore, the thickness ( Even if the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced, the decorative effect is not reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted and entertained, and the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having relief parts such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since 3112 is provided, even if the transparent decorative body 3111 is not colored, the decorative body 3111 can appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made. In addition, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion on which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided. Light from the other LED provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the production display device 1600, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the light interference fringes, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and the hologram By this, a stereoscopic effect can be imparted to a part of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 is made thin. And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the hologram has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief part such as 3111c, it is possible to give a sense of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect by the relief part, and attract the player's interest strongly. A possible decoration 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram part, a printing technique can be used to form the hologram part, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. Since the outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 and there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a sense of openness is imparted to the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 And can make the decoration look great. Therefore, the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the back movable movable body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the back movable movable decoration body. The pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's interest by the decoration of 3110 and can entertain the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flattened, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is transmitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 as much as possible. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the above-described effects can be provided.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the back of the movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back rear movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It can be shown, can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, can enjoy a large decoration, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 has a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c accommodated from behind in the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED accommodation of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is performed. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, it becomes possible to make the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 as close as possible. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the part and irradiating light from the inner surface, the part can be brightly illuminated, and the back movable movable body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be decorated with light emission without unevenness.

  Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 is of a side view type, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. The pachinko machine 1 that can irradiate light from the inner surface (the light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and achieves the above-described effects is reliably realized. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection part 3113e, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

  Note that the back-side movable decorative body 3160 and the back-back movable decorative body 3170 can also exhibit the same effects as described above.

  In addition, you may perform the lottery which gives a privilege to a player with a predetermined | prescribed probability using the 2nd production design fluctuation. In addition, the second passage opening is, for example, the rightmost one of the first big prize opening 2005, the second big prize opening 2006, the gate unit 2003, or the general prize opening 2001, the one located at the bottom, or It may be the one located at the top. If the bonus is won, the upper right symbol and the lower left symbol are stopped in a predetermined combination. The lottery includes, for example, a lottery for giving a predetermined number of game balls and a lottery for opening a winning opening different from the big winning opening. However, when a lottery to give a predetermined number of game balls is performed, it is desirable that the predetermined number is smaller than the one having the smallest expected number of acquired balls among the big hits and the small hits. This is because the main lottery in gaming machines is a special symbol lottery.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine (parrot machine) obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used as the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110. Although the decoration composed of the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. Not what you want. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3100 Backward direction production unit 3110 Backward movable decoration body (direction member)
3111 Decorative body (decorative member)
3111a First decorative projection (decoration, relief)
3111b Second decorative projection (decoration, relief)
3111c Third decorative protrusion (decoration, relief)
3111d Metal decoration (decoration)
3111e Rear recess 3111f Mounting boss 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member)
3112a First contour part (decoration, hologram part)
3112b Second contour (decoration)
3112c First light diffusion part (decoration)
3112d Second light diffusion part (decoration)
3112e Transmission part 3113 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113c First LED housing (LED housing)
3113e Reflection part 3113f Leg part 3114 Back decoration board (decoration board)
3114a First LED (LED)
3150 Decoration (decoration)
3160 Backside movable decorative body 3161 Decorative body (decorative member)
3161c Metal decoration (decoration)
3162 Decorative sheet (decorative member)
3163 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3163a LED housing portion 3163b Reflecting portion 3164 Back decoration board (decoration board)
3164a LED
3170 Rear back movable decorative body 3171 External decorative body (decorative member)
3171c Metal decoration (decoration)
3172 Internal decoration (decorative member)
3173 Light guide radiation plate (radiation plate)
3173a LED housing 3173b Reflector 3174 Back decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3174a LED

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following configuration. The gaming machine acquires lottery information related to the winning based on the establishment of the start condition, executes a lottery based on the lottery information, a display device on which the effect is displayed, and a decorative symbol on the display device. Display, execute a variation of the decorative symbol based on the establishment of the start condition, and a decorative symbol variation means for indicating the result of the lottery at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, the satisfaction of the start condition is satisfied If the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means you memorize the lottery information as the upper limit of a predetermined number, the storage hold display and the start condition corresponding to the lottery information the holding means and stored by the the current hold display corresponding to enacted the lottery information, and a hold display means for displaying as a hold display on the display device, the decorative symbol variation means, contact the particular period of variation of the decorative pattern Te, wherein it can perform a decorative pattern thus periodic first display effect that the first predetermined time as one cycle, the hold display unit in the first display effect running in the specific period, the hold display the thus is capable of executing a second predetermined time a periodic second display effect is taken as 1 cycle, the first predetermined time, the rather longer than the second predetermined time, the effect is the reach demonstration , And at least a special reach effect that is expected to be higher than the reach effect, and the first display effect is executed even after the winning effect indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed in the special reach effect. is intended a period during which the first display effect after that the Toraku effect is displayed is performed is longer than the variation pattern is a shortest time varying throughout the game state this The shall be the feature.

Claims (1)

Lottery means for acquiring lottery information related to winning based on establishment of the start condition, and executing lottery based on the lottery information;
A display device for displaying effects;
A decorative symbol display means for displaying a decorative symbol on the display device, executing a variation of the decorative symbol based on establishment of a start condition, and displaying a result of the lottery at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol;
If the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number;
A hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the lottery information held by the hold means on the display device,
The decorative design changing means can execute a periodic first display effect with a first predetermined time as one cycle for the decorative design in a specific period during the change of the decorative design,
The hold display means can execute a periodic second display effect with a second predetermined time as one cycle for the hold display during execution of the first display effect in the specific period.
The gaming machine, wherein the first predetermined time is longer than the second predetermined time.

Images